WO2021147856A1 - 配置使能方法及装置 - Google Patents

配置使能方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021147856A1
WO2021147856A1 PCT/CN2021/072700 CN2021072700W WO2021147856A1 WO 2021147856 A1 WO2021147856 A1 WO 2021147856A1 CN 2021072700 W CN2021072700 W CN 2021072700W WO 2021147856 A1 WO2021147856 A1 WO 2021147856A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
communication device
indication information
terminal device
auxiliary
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072700
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘俊
常俊仁
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21743820.9A priority Critical patent/EP4080914A4/en
Publication of WO2021147856A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021147856A1/zh
Priority to US17/869,882 priority patent/US20220361283A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0216—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave using a pre-established activity schedule, e.g. traffic indication frame
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/30—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes
    • H04W4/40—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for vehicles, e.g. vehicle-to-pedestrians [V2P]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0235—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a power saving command
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0261—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managing power supply demand, e.g. depending on battery level
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a configuration enabling method and device.
  • V2X The Internet of Vehicles
  • V2X generally refers to the provision of vehicle information through sensors and on-board terminal equipment mounted on the vehicle to achieve vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) and vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) ), a vehicle-to-network (V2N) and vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) communication network for mutual communication.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • a communication link for direct communication between a terminal device and other terminal devices may be called a side link or a side link (SL).
  • the SL interface may be called a PC5 port
  • the terminal device may include a PC5 port of a communication system such as an LTE standard or an NR standard.
  • the wireless communication link between terminal equipment and network equipment can be called uplink (UL) or downlink (downlink, DL). Since UL or DL interface can be called Uu port, UL or DL It can be called a Uu port link.
  • the terminal equipment may include a Uu port of a communication system such as the LTE standard or the NR standard.
  • a discontinuous reception (DRX) mechanism is introduced to control the terminal equipment to monitor the behavior of the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • DRX discontinuous reception
  • the effect of saving the power consumption of the terminal device under the premise of ensuring the effective transmission of data has become a problem that needs to be solved urgently.
  • the embodiment of the application provides a configuration enabling method and device.
  • SL DRX sidelink discontinuous reception
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a configuration enabling method, including: first, a first terminal device determines first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the enablement determined for the first side uplink Operation, the enabling operation includes enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is the first side uplink.
  • the first terminal device is a transmitting terminal device
  • the second terminal device is a receiving terminal device
  • the first terminal device is connected to the network device.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device receives first auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power level of the second terminal device.
  • the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power level of the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device according to The first auxiliary information determines the first indication information.
  • the first terminal device determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration according to the received first auxiliary information, that is, determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration after referring to the status or requirements of the second terminal device.
  • SL DRX configuration determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration according to the received first auxiliary information, that is, determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration after referring to the status or requirements of the second terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends first auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device Related auxiliary information.
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device instructs the second terminal to feed back its own state or demand.
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication is carried in sidelink control information (SCI), media access control element (MAC CE), or PC5-radio resource control, RRC) message.
  • SCI sidelink control information
  • MAC CE media access control element
  • RRC PC5-radio resource control
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device determines the first indication information according to the fourth service-related information, and the fourth service-related information is the difference between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the fourth service-related information may be service cycle, service volume or service duration in a specific time, or quality of service (QoS) related information, etc.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether to enable the SL DRX configuration according to the service information on the first side uplink, which improves the user experience.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends first enable indication information to the second terminal device, where the first enable indication information is used to indicate that it is the first side uplink. Can SL DRX configuration.
  • the first enabling indication information is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends first disabling indication information to the second terminal device, where the first disabling indication information is used to indicate the first side row chain Road enable SL DRX configuration.
  • the first disabling indication information further includes first SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the first SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the first disabling indication information is carried in an SCI, a medium access control element MAC CE, or a PC5-radio resource control RRC message.
  • the first disabling indication information has a flexible carrying method.
  • the first indication information further includes an identifier of a side link, or an identifier of a single communication device or an identifier of a pair of communication devices.
  • the identification of the side link includes the identification of the side link connection (sidelink connection ID) or the link identification of the side link (SL link identifier or PC5 link identifier). That is, the first indication information may also include the identification of the first side link, or the identification of the first communication device (the first terminal device), or the second communication device (the second terminal device), or the pair of communication devices.
  • the identification of the (terminal device pair) that is, the identification of the terminal device pair composed of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the sidelink may also be PC5.
  • the terminal equipment power saving signal can be DCP (DCI scrambled by PS-RNTI (power saving radio network template identity)), or wake-up signal (Wake up signal, WUS), or other power saving such as GTS (go-to-sleep signal) Signal.
  • DCP DCI scrambled by PS-RNTI (power saving radio network template identity)
  • WUS wake-up signal
  • GTS go-to-sleep signal
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to indicate the synchronization of the SL UPSS configuration and the SL DRX configuration to enable or disable.
  • the first indication information and the SL UPSS enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the first indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the first indication information may be one piece Information can also be sent in multiple pieces of information at the same time.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device receives first indication information sent by a first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the enabling of the first side uplink selection Operation, the enabling operation includes enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink It is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device; the second terminal device determines the enabling operation for the first side link according to the first indication information. The second terminal device obtains whether the first terminal device has the SL DRX configuration enabled for the first side uplink by receiving the first indication information of the first terminal device, so as to ensure that the first side uplink is enabled with the first side uplink. One terminal device is consistent.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device sends first auxiliary information to the first terminal device, and the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device provides auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device, which is beneficial for the first terminal device to determine whether to enable the SL DRX configuration for the first side link according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration. Improve the efficiency of SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal device feeds back the status or demand to the first terminal device, and serves as a reference for the first terminal device to determine the first indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device receives first auxiliary feedback indication information, where the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device Related auxiliary information.
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives the first auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the first terminal device, or the second terminal device receives the first auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the network device.
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the first auxiliary feedback indication information.
  • the first auxiliary information is triggered to be sent to the first terminal device by receiving the first auxiliary feedback indication information, which serves as a reference for the first terminal device to determine the first indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration, and the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration is related to the SL DRX configuration Related auxiliary reference information.
  • the second terminal device starts the timer T1 when sending the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device a certain time.
  • the second terminal device sends the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device:
  • One or more values in the current SL DRX-related auxiliary information of the second terminal device are different from the corresponding item value in the previous SL DRX-related auxiliary information, and the difference with the corresponding item value exceeds the preset threshold, timer T1 is not running, the battery is sufficient and the current SL DRX is in effect, or the battery is insufficient or the battery is too low and the current SL DRX is not in effect.
  • the second terminal device triggers the sending of the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration, and serves as a reference for the first terminal device to determine the first indication information.
  • the second terminal device receiving the first indication information sent by the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device receiving the first enabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, the first enabling indication The information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the first enabling indication information is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the second terminal device receiving the first indication information sent by the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device receiving the first disabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, the first disabling The enabling indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the first disabling indication information further includes first SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the first SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the first disabling indication information is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a network device determines second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for a first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes The first side uplink enables the SL DRX configuration, or, for the first side uplink disables the SL DRX configuration, the first side uplink is the connection between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Side link; the network device sends the second indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the network device determines the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration for the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, which improves the efficiency of the SL DRX configuration and the user experience.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device receives first service related information sent by the first terminal device, where the first service related information is a service between the first terminal device and the second terminal device Related information; the network device determines the second indication information according to the first service related information.
  • the first business related information may include: business cycle, business volume within a specific time, or business duration, etc.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device sends first service-related feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the first service-related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the first service-related information to the network device.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device receives second auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power level of the second terminal device.
  • the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power level of the second terminal device.
  • the network device determines the second indication information according to the second auxiliary information.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device sends second auxiliary feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the second auxiliary information to the network device.
  • the network device is based on the service-related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device and the auxiliary information of the second terminal device, that is, the network device refers to the information of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the status is that the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device determines the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration, which improves the efficiency of the SL DRX configuration and the user experience.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device sends second auxiliary feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send SL DRX to the network device Related auxiliary information.
  • the network device sending the second indication information to the first terminal device includes: the network device sending second enable indication information to the first terminal device, where the second enable indication information indicates the first side
  • the uplink enables SL DRX configuration.
  • the second enable indication information is carried in a downlink control information (DCI) message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC CE MAC CE
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the network device sending the second indication information to the first terminal device includes: the network device sending second disabling indication information to the first terminal device, and the second enabling indication information is used to indicate Disable SL DRX configuration on the first side uplink.
  • the second disabling indication information further includes second SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second SL DRX configuration release indication information is used to instruct to release the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the second disabling indication information is carried in a DCI message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • the second indication information is SL DRX configuration information, or the second indication information is included in SL DRX configuration information.
  • the second indication information further includes the identification of the side link, or the identification of a single communication device or the identification of a communication device pair. That is, the second indication information may also include the identification of the first side link, or the identification of the first communication device (the first terminal device), or the second communication device (the second terminal device), or the pair of communication devices.
  • the identification of the (terminal device pair) that is, the identification of the terminal device pair composed of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a first terminal device receives second indication information sent by a network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink,
  • the enabling operation includes enabling SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the first terminal device and the second terminal device
  • the instruction information is sent to the second terminal device to facilitate the second terminal device to obtain the instruction information
  • the content of DRX improves the efficiency of DRX configuration.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends first service-related information to the network device, where the first service-related information is the service-related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first business related information may include: business cycle, business volume within a specific time, or business duration, etc.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device receives first service related feedback indication information sent by the network device, where the first service related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the first service related information to the network device.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device receives second auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, and the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power level of the second terminal device. Sufficient indication information, power-saving type information of the terminal device, recommended SL DRX configuration, SL DRX adjustment value information of empty content, enabling or disabling one or more of SL DRX configuration indication information, and resource configuration information; The first terminal device sends the second auxiliary information to the network device.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends second auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the second auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device feeds back the status of the first terminal device and the second terminal device and the power consumption saving requirement to the network device through the first service related information and/or the second auxiliary information.
  • receiving the second indication information sent by the network device by the first terminal device includes: receiving the second enable indication information sent by the network device by the first terminal device, where the second enable indication information indicates the first Enable SL DRX configuration on one side uplink.
  • the second enable indication information is carried in a DCI message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • the first terminal device receiving the second indication information sent by the network device includes: the first terminal device receiving second disabling indication information sent by the network device, and the second enabling indication information is used for Indicates that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the second disabling indication information further includes second SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second SL DRX configuration release indication information is used to instruct to release the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the second disabling indication information is carried in a DCI message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to instruct the SL UPSS configuration to be enabled or disabled synchronously with the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second indication information and the SL UPSS enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the second indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the second indication information may be one piece Information can also be sent in multiple pieces of information at the same time.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device receives second indication information sent by a first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the enablement determined for the first side uplink Operation, the enabling operation includes enabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is the first side uplink.
  • the second terminal device determines an enabling operation for the first side link according to the second indication information.
  • the second terminal device determines the enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the indication information sent by the first terminal device for the first side uplink to determine the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration, so as to facilitate the first side uplink.
  • the SL DRX configuration information is aligned between the terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device sends second auxiliary information to the first terminal device, and the second auxiliary information includes the battery percentage information, the battery level, and the battery level of the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device provides auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device, which is beneficial for the first terminal device to determine whether to enable the SL DRX configuration for the first side link according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration. Improve the efficiency of SL DRX configuration.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device receives second auxiliary feedback indication information, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device Related auxiliary information.
  • the second terminal device receives the second auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the first terminal device, or the second terminal device receives the second auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the network device.
  • the second auxiliary information is triggered to be sent to the first terminal device by receiving the second auxiliary feedback indication information, which serves as a reference for the first terminal device to determine the second indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device determines to send the second auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration, and the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration is related to the SL DRX configuration Related auxiliary reference information.
  • the second terminal device starts a timer T2 when sending the second auxiliary information to the first terminal device
  • the second terminal device sends the second auxiliary information to the first terminal device:
  • One or more values in the current SL DRX-related auxiliary information of the second terminal device are different from the corresponding item value in the previous SL DRX-related auxiliary information, and the difference with the corresponding item value exceeds the preset threshold, timer T2 is not running, the battery is sufficient and the current SL DRX is in effect, or the battery is insufficient or the battery is too low and the current SL DRX is not in effect.
  • the second terminal device triggers the sending of the second auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration, which serves as a reference for the first terminal device to determine the second indication information.
  • the second terminal device receiving the second indication information sent by the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device receiving the second enabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, the second enabling indication The information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the second enable indication information is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the second terminal device receiving the second indication information sent by the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device receives the second disabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, and the second disabling The enabling indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the second disabling indication information further includes second SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the second SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the second disabling indication information is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device determines third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for a first side uplink, and the enabling operation Including enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, the first side uplink is the first terminal device and the second A side link between terminal devices; the second terminal device sends third indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device sends the third indication information to the first terminal after determining the enabling operation of the first side uplink, so as to facilitate the consistency of the enabling of SL DRX configuration between the first terminal device and the second terminal device .
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device receives third auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, and the third auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: 2. Service-related information and resource configuration information between terminal devices. The second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the third auxiliary information. In a possible implementation manner, the communication method further includes: the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the service-related information of the second terminal device, and the service-related information of the second terminal device includes the requirement for sending the service.
  • the second terminal device sending the third instruction information to the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device sends third enabling instruction information to the first terminal device, the third enabling instruction information Used to indicate to enable SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the second terminal device sending the third indication information to the first terminal device includes: the second terminal device sends the third disabling indication information to the first terminal device, and the third disabling The indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the third disabling indication information further includes third SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the third SL DRX configuration release indication information is used to instruct to release the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the third indication information further includes the identification of the side link, or the identification of a single communication device or the identification of a communication device pair. That is, the third indication information may also include the identification of the first side link, or the identification of the first communication device (the first terminal device), or the second communication device (the second terminal device), or the pair of communication devices.
  • the identification of the (terminal device pair) that is, the identification of the terminal device pair composed of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to instruct the SL UPSS configuration to be enabled or disabled synchronously with the SL DRX configuration.
  • the third indication information and the SL UPSS enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the third indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the third indication information may be one piece Information can also be sent in multiple pieces of information at the same time.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a first terminal device receives third indication information sent by a second terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate the enablement determined for the first side uplink Operation, the enabling operation includes enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is the first side uplink.
  • the first terminal device determines an enabling operation for the first side link according to the third indication information.
  • the first terminal device maintains the SL DRX enablement consistency with the second terminal device according to the received third indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends third auxiliary related information to the second terminal device, and the third auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: the first terminal device and the second terminal device 2. Service-related information and resource configuration information between terminal devices.
  • the first terminal device receiving the third instruction information sent by the second terminal device includes: the first terminal device receives the third enabling instruction information sent by the second terminal device, the third enabling The indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the first terminal device receiving the third indication information sent by the second terminal device includes: the first terminal device receives the third disabling indication information sent by the second terminal device, and the third disabling indication information is received by the first terminal device.
  • the enable indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the third disabling indication information further includes third SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the third SL DRX configuration release indication information is used to instruct to release the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device determines first information, the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, and the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is used to adjust the first side row The SL DRX cycle of the link, the first side link is the side link between the first communication device and the second communication device; the second terminal device sends the first information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determines the first information according to the third service related information, the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, and the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is related to the cycle adjustment value and the cycle reference value.
  • the third service related information is the service related information of the second terminal device.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value and the SL DRX cycle reference value.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value.
  • the first information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal is used to adjust the SL DRX cycle and improve user experience.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a first terminal device receives first information sent by a second terminal device, the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information Used to adjust the SL DRX cycle of the first side link, the first side link is the side link between the first communication device and the second communication device; the first terminal device performs SL DRX according to this information Period adjustment.
  • the first terminal device receives the first information sent by the second terminal device, where the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, and the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is related to the cycle adjustment value and the cycle reference value.
  • the first information further includes the SL DRX cycle reference value.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value and the SL DRX cycle reference value.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value.
  • the first terminal device adjusts the SL DRX cycle by receiving the first information sent by the second terminal, thereby improving user experience.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a first terminal device determines fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation Including enabling the power saving signal SL UPSS configuration for the side link terminal device for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, the first side uplink is the first terminal device and A side link between the second terminal device; the first terminal device sends the fourth indication information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines the enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, which is beneficial for the first terminal device and the second terminal device to keep the enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration consistent.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device receives fourth auxiliary information of the second terminal device, the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device One or more of the indication information, the power saving type information of the terminal device, and the resource configuration information; the first terminal device determines the fourth indication information according to the fourth auxiliary information.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device sends fourth auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the fourth auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to report to the first terminal The device sends fourth auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device determines the enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink by referring to the state and/or demand of the second terminal device.
  • the fourth indication information further includes the identification of the side link, or the identification of a single communication device or the identification of a communication device pair. That is, the fourth indication information may also include the identification of the first side link, or the identification of the first communication device (the first terminal device), or the second communication device (the second terminal device), or the pair of communication devices.
  • the identification of the (terminal device pair) that is, the identification of the terminal device pair composed of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device receives fourth indication information sent by a first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the usage determined for the first side uplink.
  • the enabling operation includes enabling SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the first side uplink is the first terminal device and the first side uplink.
  • the side link between the two terminal devices; the second terminal device determines the enabling operation for the first side link according to the fourth indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device sends fourth auxiliary information to the first terminal device, and the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device receives fourth auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the first terminal device, and the fourth auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first terminal device to the first terminal.
  • the device sends fourth auxiliary information.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to indicate the synchronization of the SL UPSS configuration and the SL DRX configuration to enable or disable.
  • synchronization indication information and the SL DRX enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the SL DRX indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the SL DRX indication information may be one piece of information , It can also send multiple messages at the same time.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a network device determines fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration, and the enabling operation includes: Uplink enable SL UPSS configuration, or disable SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, the first side uplink is the side uplink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device .
  • the network device sends the fifth indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the manner in which the network device determines the fifth indication information can refer to the manner in which the network device determines the second indication information in the third aspect. The difference is that the SL DRX configuration is replaced with the SL UPSS configuration.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device receives fifth service related information sent by the first terminal device, where the fifth service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device; the network device Determine fifth instruction information according to the fifth service related information.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device sends fifth service-related feedback indication information to the first terminal, where the fifth service-related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the fifth service-related information to the network device.
  • the communication method further includes: the network device receives fifth auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, the fifth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device One or more of the indication information, the power saving type information of the terminal device, and the resource configuration information; the network terminal device determines the fifth indication information according to the fifth auxiliary information.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device receives fifth auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device.
  • the fifth auxiliary information includes one or more of power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, power saving type information of the terminal device, and resource configuration information.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to instruct the SL UPSS configuration to be enabled or disabled synchronously with the SL DRX configuration.
  • the fifth indication information and the SL DRX enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the fifth indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the fifth indication information may be one piece Information can also be sent in multiple pieces of information at the same time.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second terminal device determines sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling The operation includes enabling the side-link discontinuous reception SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the first side uplink is the first terminal device and the second A side link between two terminal devices; the second terminal device sends the sixth indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device receives sixth auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, and the sixth auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: 2. Service-related information and resource configuration information between terminal devices. The second terminal device determines the sixth indication information according to the service-related information and/or resource configuration information in the sixth auxiliary information
  • the communication method further includes: the second terminal device sends sixth auxiliary feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the sixth auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the sixth auxiliary information to the second terminal device.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, which is used to instruct the SL UPSS configuration to be enabled or disabled synchronously with the SL DRX configuration.
  • the sixth indication information and the SL DRX enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the sixth indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the sixth indication information may be one piece Information can also be sent in multiple pieces of information at the same time.
  • the manner in which the second terminal device determines the sixth indication information can refer to the manner in which the second terminal device determines the third indication information in the sixth aspect.
  • the difference is that the SL DRX configuration is replaced with the SL UPSS configuration.
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second communication device determines service requirement information, the service requirement information includes whether the second communication device needs to send a service or the second communication device does not need to send a service; second communication The device determines third indication information according to the service requirement, the third indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation of the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL for the first side uplink DRX configuration, or disable SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, which is the side uplink between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the second communication device can flexibly determine the third indication information according to service requirements.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink. If the second communication device determines that there is a service to be sent, it can ensure the sending of the service by disabling the SL DRX configuration.
  • random selection is used to obtain resources within the first t time units after the second communication device determines that the service needs to be sent, where t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • the time unit in the embodiment of the present application may be seconds, milliseconds, symbols, time slots, and so on.
  • a random selection is used to acquire resources and start sensing.
  • random selection is used to obtain the resource within the first t time units after the second communication device determines that the service needs to be sent, and it is determined to obtain the resource based on the sensing result after the t time units are over. Or determine the resource, and the perception includes full sensing or partial sensing.
  • the second communication device may start sensing after it is determined that the service needs to be sent, or it may also start sensing a period of time (for example, after a few symbols) after it is determined that the service needs to be sent. In this way, random selection is used to obtain resources within t time units, and it is determined to obtain or determine resources based on the sensing result after the t time units are over, ensuring that resources for sending services can be obtained in time.
  • random selection is used to acquire resources and start sensing, and after the t time units are over, the determination is based on Perception results are used to obtain or determine resources, and the perception includes full perception or partial perception.
  • Perception results are used to obtain or determine resources, and the perception includes full perception or partial perception.
  • random selection is used to acquire resources within t time units but sensing is performed at the same time. After the t time units are over, it is determined to acquire or determine resources based on the sensing results, ensuring that resources for sending services can be acquired.
  • the second communication device when it determines that it needs to send a service, it starts sensing.
  • the second communication device before the second communication device obtains the sensing result, the second communication device obtains the resource in a randomly selected manner, and/or, after the second communication device obtains the sensing result, the second communication device obtains or determines based on the sensing result resource. In this way, the second communication device can determine a flexible resource acquisition method, ensuring that resources for sending services can be acquired.
  • the communication device needs to send services including but not limited to: the communication device is configured to perform SL communication (is configured to perfrom sidelink communication), the communication device is configured to transmit SL communication (transmit sidelink communication), or the communication device is interested in performing SL communication Communication, or the communication device is interested in sending SL communication (transmit sidelink communication).
  • the communication device is configured to perform SL communication (is configured to perfrom sidelink communication)
  • the communication device is configured to transmit SL communication (transmit sidelink communication)
  • the communication device is interested in performing SL communication Communication
  • the communication device is interested in sending SL communication (transmit sidelink communication).
  • a configuration enabling method including: a second communication device determines service requirement information, the service requirement information includes whether the second communication device needs to send a service or the second communication device does not need to send a service; second communication When the device determines that the service needs to be sent, the second communication device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the side link between the first communication device and the second communication device. Line link. In this way, the second communication device can flexibly determine the SL DRX configuration enabling mode of the first side link according to service requirements.
  • the second communication device determines third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation of the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes the first side uplink Enable the side link to discontinuously receive the SL DRX configuration, or disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side link, which is the side link between the first communication device and the second communication device link.
  • the second communication device can flexibly determine the third indication information according to service requirements.
  • the second communication device determines that it needs to send a service, it instructs a lower layer to disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the second communication device determining that the service needs to be sent includes: an upper layer of the second communication device determines that the service needs to be sent. That is, the upper layer of the second communication device may send third indication information to the lower layer, which is used to indicate the enabling operation of the SL DRX of the first side uplink.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink. If the second communication device determines that there is a service to be sent, it can ensure the sending of the service by disabling the SL DRX configuration.
  • random selection is used to obtain resources within the first t time units after the second communication device determines that the service needs to be sent, where t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • the second communication device can obtain resources for sending services in time.
  • the time unit in the embodiment of the present application may be seconds, milliseconds, symbols, time slots, and so on.
  • a random selection is used to acquire resources and start sensing.
  • random selection is used to obtain resources within the first t time units after the second communication device determines that the service needs to be sent, and after the t time units are over, it is determined to obtain resources based on the sensing result.
  • Obtain or determine resources, and the perception includes full sensing or partial sensing.
  • the second communication device may start sensing after it is determined that the service needs to be sent, or it may also start sensing a period of time (for example, after a few symbols) after it is determined that the service needs to be sent.
  • random selection is used to obtain resources within t time units, and it is determined to obtain or determine resources based on the sensing result after the t time units are over, ensuring that resources for sending services can be obtained in time.
  • random selection is used to acquire resources and start sensing, and after the t time units are over, the determination is based on Perception results are used to obtain or determine resources, and the perception includes full perception or partial perception.
  • Perception results are used to obtain or determine resources, and the perception includes full perception or partial perception.
  • random selection is used to acquire resources within t time units but sensing is performed at the same time. After t time units are over, it is determined to acquire or determine resources based on the sensing results, ensuring that resources for sending services can be acquired in time.
  • the second communication device when it determines that it needs to send a service, it starts sensing.
  • the second communication device before the second communication device obtains the sensing result, the second communication device obtains the resource in a randomly selected manner, and/or, after the second communication device obtains the sensing result, the second communication device obtains or determines based on the sensing result resource.
  • the second communication device can determine a flexible resource acquisition method, ensuring that resources for sending services can be acquired in time, further reducing time delay, and improving communication quality.
  • the need for the communication device to send services includes but is not limited to: the communication device is configured to perform SL communication, the communication device is configured to send SL communication, or the communication device is interested in SL communication, or the communication device is interested in sending SL communication.
  • a communication device including a module for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of the first to fifteenth aspects or the first to fifteenth aspects.
  • a communication device including a processor and an interface circuit
  • the interface circuit is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit them to the processor or transfer signals from the processor Sent to other communication devices other than the communication device
  • the processor is used to implement the method in any possible implementation manner of the foregoing first to second aspects or first to second aspects through logic circuits or execution code instructions, or , Used to implement the foregoing fourth to eleventh aspects or any of the fourth to eleventh aspects in any possible implementation manner, or used to implement the foregoing thirteenth to fifteenth aspects or thirteenth to third aspects The method in any possible implementation of the fifteenth aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor and an interface circuit
  • the interface circuit is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit them to the processor or transfer signals from the processor
  • the signal is sent to other communication devices other than the communication device
  • the processor is used to implement the foregoing third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect through logic circuits or execution code instructions, or to implement the foregoing
  • the twelfth aspect or any possible implementation of the twelfth aspect is provided, including a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit them to the processor or transfer signals from the processor The signal is sent to other communication devices other than the communication device, and the processor is used to implement the foregoing third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect through logic circuits or execution code instructions, or to implement the foregoing
  • the twelfth aspect or any possible implementation of the twelfth aspect is provided, including a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is used to receive signals from other
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or instruction.
  • the computer program or instruction When the computer program or instruction is executed, the first to second aspects or the fourth aspect are implemented. To the method in any one of the eleventh aspect or the fifteenth aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the twentieth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when the instructions are executed, implement the third or twelfth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner.
  • a communication chip in which instructions are stored, which when run on a computer device, cause the communication chip to execute any one of the first to fifteenth aspects and any of them Methods in possible implementations.
  • a communication system which includes the communication device of the aforementioned seventeenth aspect and/or the communication device of the eighteenth aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applied by an embodiment provided by this application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 200 provided by an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 300 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 500 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 600 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • 5G Fifth Generation
  • New Radio New Radio
  • NR device to device
  • D2D vehicle to everything
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2X refers to an important key technology that realizes environmental perception, information interaction and coordinated control through sensors and electronic tags mounted on vehicles.
  • this technology can realize vehicle-to-network (V2N), vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), and vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) communication.
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • Information interaction among others can improve the intelligent level of the vehicle and the ability of automatic driving.
  • V2N is a terminal device, and the other participant is a service entity.
  • V2N is currently the most widely used form of Internet of Vehicles. Its main function is to connect vehicles to a cloud server through a mobile network, thereby providing navigation, entertainment, and anti-theft functions through the cloud server.
  • V2V can be used as a reminder of information interaction between vehicles, and the most typical application is for the anti-collision safety system between vehicles.
  • V2P can be used to provide safety warnings to pedestrians or non-motorized vehicles on the road.
  • V2I can be used for communication between vehicles and infrastructure.
  • infrastructure can be roads, traffic lights, roadblocks, etc., and can obtain road management information such as traffic light signal timing.
  • the first communication device (first terminal device) and the second communication device (second terminal device) in the embodiments of this application may refer to user equipment (UE), subscriber station (SS), and client equipment (customer Premise Equipment, CPE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • SS subscriber station
  • CPE customer Premise Equipment
  • the terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and a wireless communication function Handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network or terminals in the public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future Devices, etc., are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may also be a software and/or hardware module deployed in an autonomous vehicle, a smart vehicle, a digital vehicle, or a vehicle network vehicle.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may refer to a D2D device or a V2X device.
  • the third communication device (network device) in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to communicate with terminal devices.
  • the network device may be a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system or code division multiple access (code division multiple access).
  • the base transceiver station (BTS) in division multiple access (CDMA) can also be the base station (NodeB, NB) in the wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or the base station (NB) in the LTE system
  • the evolved NodeB evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB
  • the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may refer to a roadside unit (RSU).
  • RSU roadside unit
  • the base station or transmission point may also include a radio unit (RU).
  • the CU implements part of the functions of the gNB or transmission point, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB or transmission point.
  • the CU implements radio resource control (RRC) and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer.
  • Function, DU realizes the functions of radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC), and physical (physical, PHY) layers. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PHCP layer signaling, can also be used.
  • the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in the access network RAN, and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in the core network CN, which is not limited here.
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating systems, Unix operating systems, Android operating systems, iOS operating systems, or windows operating systems.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided in accordance with the embodiments of the application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (digital versatile disc, DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • magnetic storage devices for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.
  • optical disks for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (digital versatile disc, DVD)
  • smart cards and flash memory devices for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • Figure 1 shows an exemplary structure diagram of a possible communication system.
  • the system architecture includes: terminal equipment (including a first terminal device and a second terminal device) and a network device. Communication between terminal devices is realized through the PC5 interface.
  • the direct communication link between terminal devices can be called a sidelink (SL).
  • the communication between the first terminal device and the network device is realized through the Uu port.
  • system architecture in FIG. 1 may also include a V2X application server (application server).
  • V2X application server application server
  • the terminal device In a wireless communication network, terminal devices are not always interacting with network devices or other terminal devices for effective information, uploading or downloading services are not always performed, and voice data is not always transmitted during a call. Therefore, by configuring discontinuous reception (DRX), the terminal device can periodically enter the sleep state at certain times, and the terminal device does not need to continuously monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). When monitoring is needed, it wakes up from the sleep state, so as to achieve the effect of saving power consumption of the terminal device.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the sidelink discontinuous reception (SL DRX) configuration in the embodiment of the present application includes at least one of the following:
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 200 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device in FIG. 2 may be the terminal device in FIG. 1 or devices in the terminal device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.).
  • part or all of the information exchanged between the first terminal device and the second terminal device in Figure 2 can be carried in an existing message, channel, signal, or signaling, or it can be a newly defined message. , Channel, signal or signaling, which is not specifically limited.
  • the method 200 includes:
  • the first terminal device determines the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation determined for the first side uplink.
  • the enabling operation includes enabling SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the first side uplink. It can be configured in SL DRX, the first side link is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, where the first terminal device is the transmitting end and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the first terminal device participates in determining the enabling operation of the first side uplink, and sends the determined enabling operation of the first side uplink to the second terminal device through the first indication information.
  • the first terminal device is the sending end
  • the second terminal is the receiving end
  • the first terminal device is connected to the network device.
  • the first indication information used to indicate the enable operation determined for the first side uplink includes: the first indication information includes first enable indication information, and the first enable indication information is used to indicate the second One side uplink enables SL DRX configuration; or, the first indication information includes first disabling indication information, and the first disabling indication information is used to instruct to disable SL DRX for the first side uplink Configuration.
  • the communication method further includes: the first terminal device determines the first indication information according to fourth service related information, where the fourth service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device .
  • the fourth service-related information may be service cycle, service volume within a specific time, or service duration, or quality of service (QoS) related information.
  • the method 200 further includes: S220: the first terminal device receives first auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, where the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power sufficient indication information of the second terminal device One or more of the power saving type information of the terminal device, the recommended SL DRX configuration, the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content, the enabling or disabling SL DRX configuration indication information, and the resource configuration information.
  • the information contained in the first auxiliary information may be in one piece of first auxiliary information, or in multiple pieces of first auxiliary information, that is, these information may be included in one piece of first auxiliary information They are sent together, or they can be sent separately or in combination in multiple pieces of first auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device determines the first indication information according to the first auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the power percentage information in the first auxiliary information that is greater than the preset threshold; conversely, if the power percentage information in the first auxiliary information is less than the preset threshold, Make sure to enable SL DRX configuration.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration when it indicates that the battery is sufficient according to the battery sufficiency indication information in the first auxiliary information; conversely, if the battery sufficiency indication information in the first auxiliary information indicates that the battery is insufficient or When the battery is too low, be sure to enable the SL DRX configuration. It is easy to understand that the judgment condition for sufficient power can be compared with the preset power.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable SL DRX configuration based on the power level in the first auxiliary information being greater than the preset level; if the power level in the first auxiliary information is less than the preset level, it determines to enable SL DRX Configuration. That is, the first terminal device judges the power state according to the power level, and further determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the first terminal device determines to enable or disable the SL DRX configuration according to the recommended SL DRX configuration in the first auxiliary information. For example, it can judge according to the cycle in the recommended SL DRX configuration, if the cycle is too short Then the SL DRX configuration is disabled, or the requirement of the second terminal device is determined according to the recommended SL DRX configuration, and the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration is determined according to the requirement.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration when the power saving type information of the terminal device in the first auxiliary information is non-power saving; otherwise, if the power saving type information of the terminal device in the first auxiliary information When the power type information is power saving, make sure to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content in the first auxiliary information; otherwise, determines to enable the SL DRX configuration. It is easy to understand that the first terminal device may also determine to enable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content in the first auxiliary information. That is to say, the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content may be an enabling trigger condition or a disabling trigger condition, and the rule is determined or predefined by the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX configuration indication information in the first auxiliary information; otherwise, determines to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the first terminal device determines the first indication information according to the service characteristics of the first side uplink.
  • the SL DRX configuration is determined to be disabled; otherwise, the SL DRX configuration is determined to be enabled.
  • the preset threshold may be determined by the first terminal device, or the preset threshold may be pre-configured, or the preset threshold may be specified by an agreement.
  • the first terminal device can also determine the disabling SL DRX configuration information according to the QoS information, for example, when the priority in the service QoS information is higher than a predetermined threshold, or the delay requirement is less than the predetermined threshold (ie, the minimum delay cell required by the service) When the predetermined threshold), determine to disable the SL DRX configuration; otherwise, determine to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • a predetermined threshold ie, the minimum delay cell required by the service
  • the method 200 further includes: S210: the first terminal device sends first auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device
  • auxiliary information related to SL DRX configuration includes the power percentage information, power level, sufficient power indication information of the second terminal device, power saving type information of the terminal device, recommended SL DRX configuration, SL DRX adjustment value information of empty content, and enable Or disable one or more of SL DRX configuration indication information and resource configuration information
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication information may include the identifier of the second terminal device.
  • the first auxiliary feedback indication is carried in an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message, for example, it can be carried in a PC5-RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the network device sends first auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, and the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device Related auxiliary information.
  • the network device pre-configures the second terminal device to send the SL DRX configuration-related auxiliary information to the first terminal device, that is, the second terminal device can independently determine to send the first auxiliary information according to the configuration of the network device.
  • the second terminal device has multiple feasible implementation manners to determine to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the first auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the first auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the network device.
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the configuration of the network device. That is, the network device configures the second terminal device to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information
  • the second terminal device when the second terminal device sends the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device, the second terminal device starts a timer (timer1, T1),
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information.
  • Condition 1 When one or more items in the current SL DRX-related auxiliary information of the second terminal device are different from the corresponding items in the previous SL DRX-related auxiliary information, that is to say, in the current SL DRX-related auxiliary information
  • the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the first auxiliary information can carry the change item, or The amount of change of this change item. For example, when the current percentage of power of the second terminal device is 50% lower than the percentage of power fed back last time, the second terminal device may send information about the percentage decrease of the current power to the first terminal device.
  • Condition 2 When the second terminal device has sufficient power and the current SL DRX configuration takes effect, the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • Condition 3 When the power of the second terminal device is insufficient or too low, and the current SL DRX configuration does not take effect, the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • Condition 4 When the second terminal device has a power saving requirement, the second terminal device determines to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink.
  • the second terminal device receives the first indication information, and performs the SL DRX configuration enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information includes first enable indication information, and the first enable indication information indicates that the first side link enables SL DRX configuration.
  • the first enabling indication information can be a newly defined message, or it can also be an existing message, such as (sidelink control information, SCI), media access control element (MAC CE), or PC5- Radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message.
  • the first enabling indication information may be SL DRX configuration information, or the first enabling indication information is carried in SL DRX configuration information.
  • the first indication information includes first disabling indication information, and the first disabling indication information indicates that the first side uplink disabling SL DRX configuration.
  • the first disabling indication information may be a newly defined message, or may also be an existing message, such as an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the first disabling indication information further includes first SL DRX configuration release indication information
  • the second terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the first SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the first terminal device determines the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration for the first side link by referring to the service-related information and/or the auxiliary information fed back by the second terminal device, and then sends the first terminal device to the second terminal device.
  • An indication information to ensure that the SL DRX configuration enablement between the first terminal device and the second terminal device is consistent, and the SL DRX enable configuration is performed according to the status and/or requirements of the second terminal device.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 300 provided by an embodiment of this application. It can be understood that part or all of the information exchanged between the device and the device in Figure 3 can be carried in an existing message, channel, signal or signaling, or it can be a newly defined message, channel, signal or signaling. This is not specifically limited.
  • the method 300 includes:
  • the network device determines second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the SL DRX configuration enabling operation determined for the first side uplink.
  • the first side link is a side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, where the first terminal device is the transmitting end and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the method 300 further includes: S330.
  • the network device receives first service related information sent by the first terminal device, where the first service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device ;
  • the network device determines the second indication information according to the first service related information.
  • the first business related information may include: business cycle, business volume within a specific time, or business duration, etc.
  • the first terminal device feeds back service-related information to the network device for reference by the network device.
  • the information related to the first service is carried in a DCI message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • the communication method 300 further includes: the network device sends first service related feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the first service related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the first service related information to the network device.
  • the feedback indication information related to the first service is carried in a DCI message, a MAC CE message, or an RRC message.
  • the network device determines the second indication information according to the information related to the first service.
  • the SL DRX configuration is determined to be disabled; otherwise, the SL DRX configuration is determined to be enabled.
  • the preset threshold may be determined by the network device, or the preset threshold may be pre-configured, or the preset threshold may be specified by an agreement.
  • the method 300 further includes: S320.
  • the network device receives second auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power indication information of the second terminal device.
  • the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power indication information of the second terminal device.
  • the network device determines the second indication information according to the second auxiliary information.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the power percentage information in the second auxiliary information that is greater than the preset threshold; conversely, if the power percentage information in the second auxiliary information is less than the preset threshold, it determines to use Can SL DRX configuration.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the sufficient battery indication information in the second auxiliary information to indicate that the battery is sufficient; conversely, if the battery sufficient indication information in the second auxiliary information indicates that the battery is insufficient, it determines Enable SL DRX configuration. It is easy to understand that the judgment condition for sufficient power, insufficient power, or low power can be compared with the preset power.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the power level in the second auxiliary information that is greater than the preset level; if the power level in the second auxiliary information is less than the preset level, determines to enable the SL DRX configuration. That is, the network device judges the power state according to the power level, and further determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration when the power saving type information of the terminal device in the second auxiliary information is non-power saving; otherwise, if the power saving type of the terminal device in the second auxiliary information When the information is power saving, make sure to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content in the second auxiliary information; otherwise, determines to enable the SL DRX configuration. It is easy to understand that the network device may also determine to enable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content in the second auxiliary information. That is to say, the SL DRX adjustment value information of the empty content may be a trigger condition for enabling or a triggering condition for disabling, and the rule is determined or predefined by the network device.
  • the network device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration according to the SL DRX configuration indication information in the second auxiliary information; otherwise, determines to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the method further includes the first terminal device sending second auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the second auxiliary information.
  • the method further includes the network device sending second auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send the second auxiliary information.
  • the network device configures the second terminal device to send the second auxiliary feedback indication information.
  • the configuration may define a new message or signaling, or it may be predefined, or it may be an existing message, such as SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the first service feedback indication information and the second auxiliary feedback indication information may be carried in the same piece of information, or may also be sent separately, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 300 further includes: S310.
  • the first terminal device receives second auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, where the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power sufficient indication of the second terminal device.
  • the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power sufficient indication of the second terminal device.
  • the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration determined for the first side uplink.
  • the first terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device. That is, the network device may send the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration determined for the first side link to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends second instruction information to the second terminal device, and correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the second instruction information from the first terminal. That is, the first terminal device may send the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration determined for the first side uplink to the second terminal device. It is easy to understand that the first terminal device may directly forward the second instruction information received in S350 to the second terminal device, or may preprocess the second instruction information received in S350 and then send it to the second terminal device. Exemplarily, preprocessing may include filtering, merging, splitting, and so on.
  • the second indication information may include second enable indication information, and the second enable indication information indicates that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the second enable indication information may be a newly defined message, or may also be an existing message, such as an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the second enabling indication information may be SL DRX configuration information, or the second enabling indication information is carried in the SL DRX configuration information.
  • the second indication information may include second disabling indication information, and the second disabling indication information indicates the first side uplink disabling SL DRX configuration.
  • the second disabling indication information may be a newly defined message, or may also be an existing message, such as an SCI, MAC CE, or PC5-RRC message.
  • the second disabling indication information further includes second SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the second terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the second SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the network device determines the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink by referring to the service-related information and/or the auxiliary information fed back by the second terminal device, and then sends the second instruction to the first terminal device After receiving the second instruction information from the network device, the first terminal sends the second instruction information to the second network device to ensure that the SL DRX configuration enablement is consistent between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, and according to the second The status and/or requirements of the terminal device are configured to enable SL DRX.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of this application. It can be understood that part or all of the information exchanged between the device and the device in Figure 4 can be carried in an existing message, channel, signal, or signaling, or it can be a newly defined message, channel, signal, or signaling. This is not specifically limited.
  • the method 400 includes:
  • the second terminal device determines third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation determined for the first side uplink.
  • the first side uplink is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, where the first terminal The device is the sending end, and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the second terminal device determines the third indication information, which can be understood as the second terminal device determines to enable or disable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the third auxiliary information.
  • the method 400 further includes: S420.
  • the second terminal device receives third auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the third auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: the first terminal device and the second terminal device Business-related information and resource configuration information.
  • the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the service-related information in the third auxiliary information, for example, when the second terminal device determines that the service period is less than a preset threshold, or the service volume per unit time is greater than the preset threshold.
  • the threshold determines to disable the SL DRX configuration; otherwise, determine to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the preset threshold may be determined by the second terminal device, or the preset threshold may be configured in advance, or the preset threshold may be stipulated by an agreement.
  • the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the resource configuration information in the third auxiliary information. For example, when resources in the resource configuration information are intensive, the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration. That is to say, when the configured resources are intensive, the second terminal device frequently receives and dispatches services, so it is determined to disable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the method further includes: S410: the first terminal device receives third auxiliary feedback indication information, where the third auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the third auxiliary information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the third auxiliary feedback indication information from the second terminal device. It can be understood that, when the second terminal device determines the third indication information, it can instruct the first terminal device to send third auxiliary information to the second terminal device.
  • the third auxiliary information includes the communication between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • Business-related information and resource configuration information may be the service cycle, the amount of service within a specific time, or the duration of the service; the resource configuration information may include the intensity of resource configuration.
  • the network device configures the first terminal to send third auxiliary information to the second terminal device. It can be understood that the network device instructs the first terminal device to send the third auxiliary information to the second terminal device through the configuration information, and the configuration information may be predefined or new signaling or message.
  • the method further includes that the second terminal device autonomously decides to send the third auxiliary information, for example, the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the sending service requirement.
  • the second terminal device uses contention resources (mode2), if the second terminal device does not need to send services, the second terminal device determines to enable the SL DRX configuration, that is, determines that the third indication information is the third enable indication information;
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration, and uses random selection in the previous second to obtain resources, and at the same time initiates sensing.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration, and/or the first t time unit after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent
  • Random selection is used to obtain resources, and t is an integer or decimal greater than 0.
  • sensing is started; and/or, after t time units are over, random selection is no longer used to acquire resources, but based on the sensing result To obtain or determine resources.
  • the sensing may be full sensing or partial sensing. It is easy to understand that t time units are only an example, and resources can also be obtained by random selection within N symbol time slots, and N is an integer greater than 0.
  • the t time units may be pre-configured or predefined, may also be determined by the second terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned time unit may be one of seconds, milliseconds, time slots, and symbols.
  • t time units may be 100 milliseconds or 1100 milliseconds or 1000 milliseconds, which is not limited by this application.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration and/or start sensing. Before the sensing result is obtained, random selection is used to obtain the resource, and/or, after the sensing result is obtained, the resource is obtained or determined based on the sensing result.
  • the switching timing between the randomly selected method and the sensing method in the embodiment of the present application can also be the first symbol after the sensing result is obtained, which can be the nth symbol, and n is an integer greater than 0, that is In other words, it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results immediately after acquiring the sensing results, or it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results after a period of time after the sensing results are acquired. It is easy to understand that the acquisition or determination of resources in the embodiments of the present application can also be understood as selecting resources or reselecting resources.
  • the communication device needs to send services including but not limited to: the communication device is configured to perform SL communication, the communication device is configured to send SL communication, or the communication device is interested in performing SL communication, or the communication device senses If you are interested in sending SL communication, or other communication devices determine that the service needs to be sent, this application is not limited.
  • the second terminal device determines the third indication information according to the energy saving requirement information.
  • the second terminal device determines that its own power level is greater than a preset threshold, or the second terminal has sufficient power, or the second terminal device is a non-power-saving terminal, or the second terminal device determines that there is no energy saving requirement, it is determined to Enable SL DRX configuration, that is, determine that the third indication information is the indication information of disabling SL DRX configuration type at this time; otherwise, determine to enable SL DRX configuration, that is, determine that the third indication information is enabled at this time SL DRX configuration type indication information.
  • the second terminal device sends third instruction information to the first terminal device, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the third instruction information. It is easy to understand that the third indication information may be sent to the first terminal device immediately after being determined in S430, or may be sent to the first terminal device after a certain period.
  • the third indication information may include third enable indication information, and the third enable indication information indicates that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the third enabling indication information may be a newly defined message, or may also be an existing message.
  • the third enabling indication information may be SL DRX configuration information, or the third enabling indication information is carried in the SL DRX configuration information.
  • the third indication information may include third disabling indication information, and the third disabling indication information indicates the first side uplink disabling SL DRX configuration.
  • the third enabling indication information may be a newly defined message, or may also be an existing message.
  • the third disabling indication information further includes third SL DRX configuration release indication information, and the first terminal device releases the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink according to the third SL DRX configuration release indication information.
  • the second terminal device may determine the third indication information by referring to multiple pieces of information (first auxiliary information, resource configuration information, sending service requirement information, etc.), that is, the second terminal device determines the third indication information
  • first auxiliary information resource configuration information
  • sending service requirement information etc.
  • the third indication information can be determined to be sent to the first terminal device, or a combination of trigger conditions (for example, After triggering condition 1 and triggering condition 2), it is determined to send the third indication information to the first terminal device.
  • trigger conditions include the trigger conditions introduced above: whether the second terminal device sends services, that is, whether there is a demand for sending services, whether the amount of service to be sent exceeds a preset threshold, whether the business duration exceeds the threshold, and whether the second terminal device Electricity information, energy-saving demand information, etc., also include trigger conditions such as timer duration.
  • the second terminal device in order to prevent the second terminal device from sending the third indication information too frequently, after the second terminal device determines whether to enable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, There are many feasible methods to prevent frequent sending of information indicating the enabling or disabling of SL DRX configuration to the first terminal device. In other words, after the second terminal device determines the third indication information, it can determine whether to send it to the first terminal device. Send the third instruction information.
  • the second terminal device determines to send a third instruction to the first terminal device when the trigger condition of whether to send a service, that is, whether there is a sending service requirement, is satisfied information. Or, the second terminal device determines whether the three trigger conditions of whether the second terminal device sends services, that is, whether there is a need to send services, whether the volume of services to be sent exceeds a preset threshold, and the duration of the service exceeds the preset threshold, are all met at the same time, the second terminal device determines Send the third instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • an autonomous resource allocation method for example, mode 2
  • the second terminal device determines to send a third instruction to the first terminal device when the trigger condition of whether to send a service, that is, whether there is a sending service requirement, is satisfied information.
  • the second terminal device determines whether the three trigger conditions of whether the second terminal device sends services, that is, whether there is a need to send services, whether the volume of services to be sent exceeds a preset threshold, and the duration of the service exceeds
  • the second terminal device is only when the three triggering conditions of whether the second terminal device sends services are required to send services, whether the volume of services to be sent exceeds a preset threshold, and the timer (timer2, T2) is not running at the same time. It is determined to send the third instruction information to the first terminal device, where the T2 of the timer may be started when the second terminal device sends an instruction to the first terminal device to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal determines that the conditions for triggering enabling or disabling SL DRX are satisfied according to whether to send services, it waits for a period of time before notifying the first terminal device to enable or disable the communication between it and the second terminal device.
  • SL DRX configuration Exemplary, when the second terminal device instructs the first terminal device to enable the SL DRX configuration, the timer T2 is started; subsequently, when the condition for triggering the SL DRX configuration to be disabled is determined according to whether to send the service, if T2 is not available Running, the second terminal device instructs the first terminal device to enable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal device determines that the conditions for triggering SL DRX to be disabled according to whether to send services, first only disable the SL DRX configuration on the second terminal side, if the volume of services to be sent exceeds the preset threshold, or the service continues When the duration exceeds the preset threshold, the first terminal device is instructed to disable the SL DRX configuration between it and the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device when the second terminal device determines that the disabling condition is met, that is, when it determines that the third indication information is the third disabling indication information, the second terminal device may immediately trigger the disabling Enable the SL DRX configuration on the second terminal device side, and then send the third disabling indication information to the first terminal device after a certain time or period.
  • the trigger condition for disabling when the trigger condition for disabling is met, the receiving end terminal device can immediately trigger the disabling of the SL DRX configuration at the receiving end, and then notify the sending end terminal device to disable the SL DRX configuration after a period of time.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal device can The configuration and enabling operation of SL DRX needs to be determined flexibly, and the method includes:
  • the second terminal device determines third indication information according to the service requirement information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation of the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link for the first side uplink Discontinuous reception of the SL DRX configuration, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, which is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides several possible ways for the second terminal device to obtain resources:
  • Resource acquisition method 1 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, where t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • Resource acquisition method 2 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time unit after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, and the sensing is started.
  • Resource acquisition method 3 Use random selection to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, start sensing, and after t time units are over, determine to acquire or determine based on the sensing results Reselect resources.
  • Resource acquisition method 4 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, and after t time units are over, it is determined to acquire or reselect resources based on the sensing result. It is easy to understand that the second terminal device can start sensing immediately after the end of t time units, or start sensing after M time units after the end of t time units. M is an integer greater than 0. This application does not limited.
  • the second terminal device before obtaining the sensing result, obtains the resource in a random selection manner, and/or, after the second terminal device obtains the sensing result, the second terminal device obtains or determines the resource based on the sensing result.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration, and/or before the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent
  • Each time unit is randomly selected to obtain resources, and t is an integer or decimal greater than 0.
  • sensing is started; and/or, after t time units are over, random selection is no longer used to acquire resources, but based on the sensing result To obtain or determine resources.
  • the sensing may be full sensing or partial sensing.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration and/or start sensing. Before the sensing result is obtained, random selection is used to obtain the resource, and/or, after the sensing result is obtained, the resource is obtained or determined based on the sensing result.
  • the switching timing between the randomly selected method and the sensing method in the embodiment of the present application can also be the first symbol after the sensing result is obtained, which can be the nth symbol, and n is an integer greater than 0, that is In other words, it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results immediately after acquiring the sensing results, or it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results after a period of time after the sensing results are acquired. It is easy to understand that the acquisition or determination of resources in the embodiments of the present application can also be understood as selecting resources or reselecting resources.
  • the t time units in the present application may be pre-configured or predefined, may also be determined by the second terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the time unit may be one of seconds, milliseconds, time slots, and symbols.
  • t time units may be 100 milliseconds or 1100 milliseconds or 1000 milliseconds, which is not limited by this application.
  • the second terminal device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device determines the enabling operation of SL DRX of the first side uplink according to the third indication information, Align with the second terminal device to ensure the quality of side-link communication.
  • the second communication device instructs the first communication device to enable SL DRX, which is helpful to reduce the power consumption of the side link; in addition, the second communication device instructs the first communication device to disable SL DRX to improve the first communication device.
  • the resource scheduling efficiency (or resource utilization rate) of a communication device guarantees the quality of service sent by the first communication device to the second communication device.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration.
  • the second terminal device can The configuration and enabling operation of SL DRX needs to be determined flexibly, and the method includes:
  • the second terminal device determines that it needs to send a service
  • the second terminal device determines that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the connection between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. Side link.
  • the method may further include the second terminal device determining service requirement information, where the service requirement includes that the second terminal device needs to send the service or the second terminal device does not need to send the service .
  • the second terminal device determines third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation of the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link for the first side uplink Discontinuous reception of the SL DRX configuration, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, which is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determining the third indication information may be understood as the second terminal device determining the third indication information according to the service requirement information. Or, it can also be understood that the second terminal device determines the third indication information after receiving an indication from another network element.
  • the second terminal device determines that it needs to send a service, it instructs a lower layer to disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the second terminal device determining that the service needs to be sent includes: the upper layer of the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent. That is, the upper layer of the second terminal device may send third indication information to the lower layer to indicate the enabling operation of SL DRX of the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling SL DRX or disabling SL DRX.
  • the upper layer of the second terminal device is a protocol layer above the lower layer of the second terminal device.
  • the upper layer can be the application layer
  • the lower layer can be the vehicle to everything (V2X) layer or the access stratum (AS); in another possible way, the upper layer can be the V2X layer, and the lower layer can be Access layer.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • AS access stratum
  • this embodiment of the present application provides several possible ways for the second terminal device to obtain resources:
  • Resource acquisition method 1 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, where t is an integer or a decimal greater than 0.
  • Resource acquisition method 2 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time unit after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, and the sensing is started.
  • Resource acquisition method 3 Use random selection to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, start sensing, and after t time units are over, determine to acquire or determine based on the sensing results Reselect resources.
  • Resource acquisition method 4 Random selection is used to acquire or determine resources within the first t time units after the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent, and after t time units are over, it is determined to acquire or reselect resources based on the sensing result. It is easy to understand that the second terminal device can start sensing immediately after the end of t time units, or start sensing after M time units after the end of t time units. M is an integer greater than 0. This application does not limited.
  • the second terminal device before obtaining the sensing result, obtains the resource in a random selection manner, and/or, after the second terminal device obtains the sensing result, the second terminal device obtains or determines the resource based on the sensing result.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration, and/or before the second terminal device determines that the service needs to be sent
  • Each time unit is randomly selected to obtain resources, and t is an integer or decimal greater than 0.
  • sensing is started; and/or, after t time units are over, random selection is no longer used to acquire resources, but based on the sensing result To obtain or determine resources.
  • the sensing may be full sensing or partial sensing.
  • the second terminal device determines to disable the SL DRX configuration and/or start sensing. Before the sensing result is obtained, random selection is used to obtain the resource, and/or, after the sensing result is obtained, the resource is obtained or determined based on the sensing result.
  • the switching timing between the randomly selected method and the sensing method in the embodiment of the present application can also be the first symbol after the sensing result is obtained, which can be the nth symbol, and n is an integer greater than 0, that is In other words, it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results immediately after acquiring the sensing results, or it can be switched to acquiring or determining resources based on the sensing results after a period of time after the sensing results are acquired. It is easy to understand that the acquisition or determination of resources in the embodiments of the present application can also be understood as selecting resources or reselecting resources.
  • the t time units in the present application may be pre-configured or predefined, may also be determined by the second terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the time unit may be one of seconds, milliseconds, time slots, and symbols.
  • t time units may be 100 milliseconds or 1100 milliseconds or 1000 milliseconds, which is not limited by this application.
  • the second terminal device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device determines the enabling operation of SL DRX of the first side uplink according to the third indication information, Align with the second terminal device to ensure the quality of side-link communication.
  • the second communication device instructs the first communication device to enable SL DRX, which is helpful to reduce the power consumption of the side link; in addition, the second communication device instructs the first communication device to disable SL DRX to improve the first communication device.
  • the resource scheduling efficiency (or resource utilization rate) of a communication device guarantees the quality of service sent by the first communication device to the second communication device.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 500 provided by an embodiment of this application. It can be understood that part or all of the information exchanged between the device and the device in Figure 5 can be carried in an existing message, channel, signal, or signaling, or it can be a newly defined message, channel, signal, or signaling. This is not specifically limited.
  • the method 500 includes:
  • the second terminal device determines the first information.
  • the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, and the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is used to adjust the SL DRX cycle of the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is the communication between the first communication device and the second communication device. Side link between devices.
  • the first terminal device is the sending end, and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the second terminal device determines the first information according to the third service related information.
  • the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is related to a cycle adjustment value and a cycle reference value, and the third service related information is service related information of the second terminal device.
  • the third service related information includes current service delay requirement information, actual transmission status information, or current delay budget, etc.
  • the actual transmission status information may include service arrival time information, that is,
  • the second terminal device may determine the SL DRX cycle adjustment value according to one or more of the current service delay requirement, the delay budget, and the actual transmission situation.
  • the period adjustment indication information is related to the period adjustment value and the period reference value, and it can be understood that the period adjustment indication information includes the period adjustment value and the period reference value.
  • the period reference value can be understood as the basic unit of period adjustment, for example, the reference value is 20, 40, 60...; the adjustment value can be 0 or 1; when the adjustment value is 1, it means that the reference value is doubled. When the adjustment value is 0, it represents a doubling of the reference value.
  • the period adjustment value and the period reference value may also have other corresponding rules. For example, there is a functional relationship between the reference value and the adjustment value, which is not limited in the embodiment of the application.
  • the period adjustment indication information is related to the period adjustment value and the period reference value. It can be understood that the period adjustment indication information includes the period adjustment value, and the period reference value is pre-configured. There is a corresponding relationship with the period reference value. In the embodiment of the present application, there are multiple pre-configured implementation modes for the period reference value, one of which may be pre-configured or pre-defined. Another pre-configuration implementation may be through an RRC reconfiguration message, or a MAC CE or SCI configuration instruction.
  • the network device is configured or instructed to the first terminal device first, and then the second terminal device is configured or instructed by the first terminal device, or the second terminal device is configured or instructed by the first terminal device, or the second terminal device is configured or instructed by the second terminal device.
  • the device configures or instructs the first terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are pre-configured with the aforementioned period reference value, and the first information includes the period adjustment value, and the period adjustment value is related to the pre-configured period reference value (correspondence).
  • the second terminal device sends the first information to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal receives the first information, and performs SL DRX cycle adjustment according to the first information.
  • the limitation of the amount of feedback information of the terminal device is overcome, and the user experience is improved.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction of a communication method 600 provided by an embodiment of this application. It can be understood that part or all of the information exchanged between the device and the device in Figure 6 can be carried in an existing message, channel, signal, or signaling, or it can be a newly defined message, channel, signal, or signaling. This is not specifically limited.
  • the method 600 includes:
  • the first terminal device determines fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link for the first side uplink Terminal equipment power saving signal (sidelink user equipment saving signal, SL UPSS) configuration, or disabling SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink, the first side uplink is one of the first terminal device and the second terminal device In the side link between, the first terminal device is the transmitting end, and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • SL UPSS sidelink user equipment saving signal
  • the method 600 further includes: S610, the first terminal device receives fourth auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, where the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power indication information of the second terminal device, One or more of power saving type information and resource configuration information of the terminal device; the first terminal device determines the fourth indication information according to the fourth auxiliary information.
  • the method 600 further includes: the first terminal device sends fourth auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the fourth auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to report to the first terminal device Send the fourth auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device determines the fourth indication information according to the fourth auxiliary information.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL UPSS configuration when the power percentage information in the fourth auxiliary information is greater than the preset threshold; conversely, if the power percentage information in the fourth auxiliary information is less than the preset threshold, Make sure to enable SL UPSS configuration.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL UPSS configuration when it indicates that the battery is sufficient according to the battery sufficient indication information in the fourth auxiliary information; conversely, if the battery sufficient indication information in the fourth auxiliary information indicates that the battery is insufficient or When the power is too low, be sure to enable the SL UPSS configuration. It is easy to understand that the judgment condition for sufficient power can be compared with the preset power.
  • the first terminal device determines to disable the SL UPSS configuration when the power saving type information of the terminal device in the fourth auxiliary information is non-power saving; otherwise, if the power saving type information of the terminal device in the fourth auxiliary information When the power type information is power saving, make sure to enable the SL UPSS configuration.
  • the fourth indication information further includes synchronization indication information, and the synchronization indication information is used to enable or disable the SL UPSS configuration and the SL DRX configuration synchronously.
  • S630 The first terminal device sends fourth indication information to the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives the fourth indication information sent by the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device refers to the auxiliary information fed back by the second terminal device to determine the fourth indication information, which is used to indicate the enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration of the first side uplink, ensuring that the first terminal device and the The SL UPSS configuration enablement between the second terminal devices is consistent.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method 700, and the method 700 includes:
  • the network device determines fifth indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the SL UPSS configuration enabling operation determined for the first side uplink.
  • the first side link is a side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, where the first terminal device is the transmitting end and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the method 700 further includes: S730.
  • the network device receives fifth service related information sent by the first terminal device, where the fifth service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device ;
  • the network device determines the fifth indication information according to the fifth service related information. For the sending and carrying manner of the fifth service related information, refer to the related description in S330.
  • the communication method 700 further includes: the network device sends fifth service-related feedback indication information to the first terminal, where the fifth service-related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the fifth service-related information to the network device.
  • the fifth service-related feedback indication information and the first service-related feedback indication information in the method 300 may be one piece of information or multiple pieces of information.
  • the communication method 700 further includes: S720.
  • the network device receives fifth auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the fifth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and power sufficient indication information of the second terminal device.
  • the network device determines fifth indication information according to the fifth auxiliary information.
  • the implementation method is similar to the description in S320, and will not be repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication method 700 further includes: S710.
  • the first terminal device receives fifth auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, where the fifth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the fifth auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, and sufficient power of the second terminal device.
  • the network device sends fifth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration determined for the first side uplink.
  • the first terminal device receives the fifth instruction information from the network device. That is, the network device may send the enabling operation of the SL UPSS configuration determined for the first side uplink to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends fifth instruction information to the second terminal device, and correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the fifth instruction information from the first terminal. That is, the first terminal device may send the enabling operation of the SL DRX configuration determined for the first side uplink to the second terminal device.
  • S750 and S760 refer to the description in S350 and S360.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method 800, and the method 800 includes:
  • the second terminal device determines sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the enable operation determined for the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is one of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is the transmitting end, and the second terminal device is the receiving end.
  • the second terminal device determines the sixth indication information, which can be understood as the second terminal device determines to enable or disable the SL UPSS configuration.
  • the method 800 further includes: S820.
  • the second terminal device receives sixth auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the sixth auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: the first terminal device and the second terminal device Business-related information and resource configuration information.
  • the manner in which the second terminal device determines the sixth indication information according to the service-related information and/or resource configuration information in the sixth auxiliary information may refer to the description in S420 in the method 400.
  • the method further includes: S810, the second terminal device sends sixth auxiliary feedback indication information to the first terminal device, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the sixth auxiliary feedback indication information. It is similar to the implementation in S410 in the method 400.
  • the second terminal device sends sixth indication information to the first terminal device, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the sixth indication information.
  • the sending mode of the sixth indication information is similar to the description in S440. It is easy to understand that the third indication information and the sixth indication information in the embodiment of the present application may be independent information or a piece of information, that is, The enabling operation of SL DRX and SL UPSS can be indicated at the same time.
  • the indication information (first indication information, second indication information, third indication information, and/or fourth indication information) used to enable configuration (SL DRX configuration and/or SL UPSS configuration) also includes The identification of the side link, or the identification of a single communication device or the identification of a pair of communication devices. That is, the first indication information may also include the identification of the first side link, or the identification of the first communication device (first terminal device), or the identification of the second communication device (second terminal device), or communication The identification of the device pair (terminal device pair), that is, the identification of the terminal device pair composed of the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned instruction information for enabling configuration can also be sent separately from the corresponding identification information, that is, the two can be one piece of information, or they can be included in multiple pieces of information.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limited.
  • the instruction information used to enable the configuration includes the first instruction information determined by the first terminal device, the second instruction information determined by the second terminal device, the third instruction information determined by the network device, and/or the first terminal device determined
  • the fourth indication information that is, in the embodiment of this application, when the network device indicates to a certain sending end UE, or the sending end UE to a certain receiving end UE, or the receiving end UE to a certain sending end UE to enable (enable )/Disable (disable) SL DRX configuration and/or SL UPSS configuration, at the same time indicate the corresponding SL link identifier (SL link identifier), or a single UE ID, or UE ID pair.
  • SL link identifier SL link identifier
  • the identity of a single communication device may include serving-temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-TMSI), international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) ), one or more of a subscription permanent identifier (SUPI), a globally unique temporary UE identity (GUTI), or a layer 1 identity (or a layer 2 identity) of the first communication device.
  • S-TMSI serving-temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • SUPI subscription permanent identifier
  • GUI globally unique temporary UE identity
  • the identity of the second terminal device may include one of the S-TMSI, IMSI, SUPI, GUTI of the second terminal device, or the layer 1 identity (or layer 2 identity) of the second terminal device.
  • the identity of the terminal device pair can include the source layer 2 identity and the destination layer 2 Identification: ⁇ source L2 ID, destination L2 ID ⁇ ; or, the identification of the terminal device pair may include the source layer 1 identification, and the destination layer 1 identification: ⁇ source L1ID, destination L1ID ⁇ .
  • the identifier included in the indication information for enabling configuration may be the identifier of the second terminal device, or the target layer 1 or layer 2 identifier in the UE ID pair may be the identifier of the second terminal device.
  • the identifier included in the indication information for enabling configuration may be the destination L2 ID or destination L1ID associated with the SL multicast or SL broadcast service, which is different from SL unicast, where the destination is The L2 ID or destination L1ID is not the identification of the second terminal device.
  • the identifier in the terminal device pair may also be the destination L2 ID or destination L1 ID associated with the SL multicast or SL broadcast service.
  • the first terminal device is the transmitting end terminal device
  • the second terminal device is the receiving end terminal device
  • the side link corresponding to the instruction information for enabling configuration can be identified, or the single terminal device or terminal device pair corresponding to the instruction information for enabling configuration, which is beneficial to the instruction information and the side link. Correspondence between uplinks.
  • the communication method further includes: synchronization indication information, where the synchronization indication information is used to indicate the synchronization of the SL UPSS configuration and the SL DRX configuration to enable or disable.
  • the synchronization indication information and the SL DRX enable indication information are sent at the same time, and the synchronization indication information may be included in the SL DRX indication information or sent independently, that is, the synchronization indication information and the SL DRX indication information may be one piece of information , It can also send multiple messages at the same time.
  • the synchronization indication information may also be included in the SL UPSS indication information, or the SL UPSS indication information and the SL DRX indication information may be the same indication information, or multiple indication information, which may be sent at the same time, or, Sending sequentially, the embodiment of this application is not limited. It is easy to understand that in a possible implementation, the simultaneous sending of SL UPSS indication information and SL DRX indication information is predefined by the protocol, that is, by default, SL UPSS indication information and SL DRX indication information are sent at the same time, or in other words, one The indication information indicates both the enabling operation of SL UPSS and the enabling operation of SL DRX.
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic.
  • the various numerical numbers or serial numbers involved in the various processes described above are only for easy distinction for description, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a corresponding device, which includes a corresponding module for executing the foregoing embodiment.
  • the module can be software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. It can be understood that the technical features described in the method embodiments are also applicable to the following device embodiments.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a transceiving unit 1100.
  • the communication device 1000 further includes a processing unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the method 200 or the method 300 or the method 400 or the method 500 or the method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a device for executing the method in FIG. 2 200, or a unit of the method executed by the first terminal device in the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4 or the method 500 in FIG. 5 or the method 600 in FIG. 6.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations or functions described above are used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, or the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, or the method 500 in FIG. 5, or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the corresponding process of the first terminal device is used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, or the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, or the method 500 in FIG. 5, or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the corresponding process of the first terminal device is described in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1200 may be used to determine first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side line link, and the enabling operation includes being the first side line link. Enable the side link discontinuous reception of SL DRX configuration, or disable SL DRX configuration for the first side link, the first side link is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device link.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 may be configured to send the first indication information to the second terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive first auxiliary information sent by the second terminal device, where the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, sufficient power indication information, and terminal device power saving information of the second terminal device.
  • first auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, sufficient power indication information, and terminal device power saving information of the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine the first indication information according to the first auxiliary information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to send first auxiliary feedback indication information to the second terminal device, where the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send SL DRX configuration related auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine the first indication information according to fourth service related information, where the fourth service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 may be configured to send first enable indication information to the second terminal device, where the first enable indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 may be configured to send first disabling indication information to the second terminal device, where the first disabling indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the first side uplink.
  • the SL DRX configuration can be enabled, or the SL DRX configuration can be disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the first side uplink is the side uplink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send second indication information to the second terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send first service related information to the network device, where the first service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive first service related feedback indication information sent by the network device, where the first service related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the first service related information to the network device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive second enable indication information sent by the network device, where the second enable indication information indicates the first side uplink enable SL DRX configuration.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive second disabling indication information sent by the network device, where the second enabling indication information is used to indicate the first side uplink disabling SL and DRX configuration.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive third indication information sent by the second terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the enable operation determined for the first side line link, and the enable operation includes the first side line link Enable the side link to discontinuously receive SL DRX configuration, or disable SL DRX configuration for the first side link, the first side link is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device link.
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine an enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the third indication information.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send third auxiliary related information to the second terminal device, where the third auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: business related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device Information, resource configuration information.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive third enable indication information sent by the second terminal device, where the third enable indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive third disabling indication information sent by the second terminal device, where the third disabling indication information is used to instruct to disable SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink .
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive first information sent by a second terminal device, the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information, and the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is related to a cycle adjustment value and a cycle reference value.
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to perform SL DRX cycle adjustment according to the information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link for the first side uplink
  • the terminal device power saving signal SL UPSS configuration, or the first side uplink disabling SL UPSS configuration, the first side uplink is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to send fourth indication information to the second terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive fourth auxiliary information of the second terminal device, where the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, and power saving of the terminal device.
  • the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, and power saving of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine fourth indication information according to the fourth auxiliary information.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the second terminal device in the method 200 or the method 300 or the method 400 or the method 500 or the method 600 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a device for executing the method in FIG. 2 200, or a unit of the method executed by the second terminal device in the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4, or the method 500 in FIG. 5, or the method 600 in FIG.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations or functions described above are used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, or the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, or the method 500 in FIG. 5, or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the corresponding process of the second terminal device is used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, or the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the method 400 in FIG. 4, or the method 500 in FIG. 5, or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the corresponding process of the second terminal device is used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, or the method 300 in FIG. 3, or the
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate an enable operation selected for the first side uplink, and the enable The operation includes enabling the side link discontinuous reception SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, or disabling the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the first terminal device And the side link between the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine an enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the first indication information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to send first auxiliary information to the first terminal device, where the first auxiliary information includes power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, and power saving type of the terminal device One or more of information, SL DRX adjustment value information of empty content, enabling or disabling SL DRX configuration indication information, and resource configuration information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to receive first auxiliary feedback indication information, where the first auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send SL DRX configuration-related auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive the first auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the network device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine to send the first auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration, where the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration is auxiliary reference information related to the SL DRX configuration.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to receive first enable indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the first enable indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive first disabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the first disabling indication information is used to indicate the first side uplink disabling SL and DRX configuration.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive second indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the enable operation determined for the first side link, and the enable operation includes the first side link.
  • Link-enabled SL DRX configuration or, for the first side uplink disabling SL DRX configuration, the first side uplink is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device Line link.
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine an enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the second indication information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to send second auxiliary information to the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, and power saving type of the terminal device One or more of information, SL DRX adjustment value information of empty content, enabling or disabling SL DRX configuration indication information, and resource configuration information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to receive second auxiliary feedback indication information, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the second terminal device to send SL DRX configuration-related auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive second auxiliary feedback indication information sent by the network device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine to send the second auxiliary information to the first terminal device according to the auxiliary information related to the SL DRX configuration.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to receive second enable indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the second enable indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive second disabling indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the second disabling indication information is used to indicate the first side uplink disabling SL and DRX configuration.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the processing unit 1200 is used for third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling the side link discontinuity for the first side uplink Receive the SL DRX configuration, or disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to receive third auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device, where the third auxiliary information includes one or more of the following information: service-related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device , Resource configuration information.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine third indication information according to the third auxiliary information.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine third indication information according to service-related information of the second terminal device, where the service-related information of the second terminal device includes a requirement for sending a service.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send third enabling indication information to the first terminal device, where the third enabling indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is enabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to send third disabling indication information to the first terminal device, where the third disabling indication information is used to instruct to disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the processing unit is used to determine first information.
  • the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information.
  • the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is used to adjust the SL DRX cycle of the first side uplink, and the first side uplink is the first side uplink.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine first information according to the third service related information.
  • the first information includes SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information.
  • the SL DRX cycle adjustment indication information is related to the cycle adjustment value and the cycle reference value.
  • the business-related information is the business-related information of the second terminal device
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to send the first information to the first terminal device.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value and the SL DRX cycle reference value.
  • the first information includes the SL DRX cycle adjustment value.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to receive fourth indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes the first side uplink Enable the SL UPSS configuration, or disable the SL UPSS configuration for the first side uplink.
  • the first side uplink is the side uplink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine an enabling operation for the first side uplink according to the fourth instruction information.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is further configured to send fourth auxiliary information to the first terminal device.
  • the fourth auxiliary information includes power percentage information of the second terminal device, power level, sufficient power indication information, and power saving type of the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8
  • the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface circuit.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first network device in the method 300 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 300 in FIG. 3.
  • the units in the communication device 1000 and the other operations or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the first network device in the method 300 in FIG. 3.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to:
  • the processing unit 1200 is configured to determine second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate an enabling operation determined for the first side uplink, and the enabling operation includes enabling SL DRX for the first side uplink Configure, or disable the SL DRX configuration for the first side uplink, where the first side uplink is the side link between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 is configured to send the second indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive first service related information sent by the first terminal device, where the first service related information is service related information between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine second indication information according to the first service related information.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send first service related feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the first service related feedback indication information is used to instruct to send the first service related information to the network device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to receive second auxiliary information sent by the first terminal device.
  • the second auxiliary information includes power percentage information, power level, sufficient power indication information, and terminal information of the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1200 is further configured to determine second indication information according to the second auxiliary information.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send second auxiliary feedback indication information to the first terminal device, where the second auxiliary feedback indication information is used to instruct the first terminal device to send SL DRX-related auxiliary information to the network device.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send second enable indication information to the first terminal device, where the second enable indication information indicates that the first side uplink enables the SL DRX configuration.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 is further configured to send second disabling indication information to the first terminal device, where the second enabling indication information is used to indicate that the SL DRX configuration is disabled for the first side uplink.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the network device 2000 shown in FIG. 8
  • the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the processor 2010 in the network device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface circuit.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device (the first terminal device or the second terminal device) in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used to call and transfer from the memory 2030. Run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 7.
  • the above transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 7, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement each process (the first terminal device or the second terminal device) involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 2 to 6.
  • the operation or function of each module in the terminal device 2000 is to implement the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100.
  • the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes: computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 6.
  • the method on the terminal device side (the first terminal device or the second terminal device) in the exemplary embodiment is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 6
  • the method on the network device side (the first network device or the second network device) in the embodiment is shown.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices (for example, the first terminal device, the second terminal device) and one or more network devices (for example, The first network device, the second network device).
  • terminal devices for example, the first terminal device, the second terminal device
  • network devices for example, The first network device, the second network device
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the communication method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments.
  • the processing unit executes the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components can also be system on chip (SoC), central processor unit (CPU), or network processor (network processor).
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • network processor network processor
  • processor can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), can also be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU), can also be a programmable controller (programmable logic device, PLD) or other Integrated chip.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • PLD programmable controller
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the processing unit used to execute these technologies at a communication device can be implemented in one or more general-purpose processors, DSPs, digital signal processing devices, ASICs, Programmable logic device, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware component, or any combination of the foregoing.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor.
  • the general-purpose processor may also be any traditional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • the processor can also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration. accomplish.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the function of any of the foregoing method embodiments is realized.
  • This application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, realizes the functions of any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
  • system and “network” in this article are often used interchangeably in this article.
  • the term “and/or” in this article is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, which means that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, exist alone In the three cases of B, A can be singular or plural, and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • At least one of! or "at least one of" as used herein means all or any combination of the listed items, for example, "at least one of A, B and C", It can mean: A alone exists, B alone exists, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B and C exist at the same time, and there are six cases of A, B and C at the same time, where A can be singular or plural, and B can be Singular or plural, C can be singular or plural.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined according to A.
  • determining B based on A does not mean that B is determined only based on A, and B can also be determined based on A and/or other information.
  • the “pre-defined” in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as definition, pre-definition, storage, pre-storage, pre-negotiation, pre-configuration, curing, or pre-fired.
  • the configuration in the embodiments of this application can be understood as notification through RRC signaling, MAC signaling, and physical layer information, where the physical layer information can be notified through PDCCH or physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH), or physical side link Control channel (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH), or physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH) transmission.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

本申请提供一种配置使能方法及装置。该方法包括：第一终端设备确定第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能侧行链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息。通过本申请提供的方法，第一终端设备参考第二终端设备的状态或需求，引入了SL DRX配置的使能机制，提升了用户体验。

Description

配置使能方法及装置
本申请要求于2020年1月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010075658.4、申请名称为“配置使能方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，并要求于2020年8月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010851968.0、申请名称为“配置使能方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种配置使能方法及装置。
背景技术
车联网(vehicle to everthing，V2X)一般是指通过装载在车上的传感器、车载终端设备等提供车辆信息，实现车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)，车辆到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)，车辆到网络(vehicle to Network，V2N)以及车辆到行人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)之间的相互通信的通信网络。一般的，在V2X场景下，终端设备与其他终端设备之间进行直连通信的通信链路可以称之为边链路或者侧链路(sidelink，SL)。SL接口可以称之为PC5口，终端设备可以包括LTE制式或者NR制式等通信系统的PC5口。终端设备与网络设备之间的无线通信链路可以称之为上行链路(uplink，UL)或者下行链路(downlink，DL)，由于UL或DL接口可以称之为Uu口，所以UL或者DL可以称之为Uu口链路。终端设备可以包括LTE制式或者NR制式等通信系统的Uu口。
在无线通信系统中，引入了一种非连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)机制来控制终端设备监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)的行为，达到节省终端设备的功耗的效果。然而，在终端设备与其他终端设备之间的SL链路中，在保证数据能够有效传输的前提下，达到节省终端设备的功耗的效果，成为亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种配置使能方法及装置，通过考虑侧链路非连续接收(sidelink discontinuous reception，SL DRX)配置使能机制以及在确定SL DRX配置时参考终端设备的状态或需求，在保证数据能够有效传输的前提下，达到节省终端设备的功耗的效果。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：首先，第一终端设备确定第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；接着，所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息。因此，第一终端设备通过向第二终端设备指示是否使能SL DRX配置，引入了DRX使能机制，提高了第一侧行链路上的DRX配置的效率，提升了用户体验。
可选的，第一终端设备为发送端终端设备，第二终端设备为接收端设备，第一终端设备与网络设备连接。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第一辅助信息，该第一辅助信息包括该第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；第一终端设备根据该第一辅助信息确定该第一指示信息。
通过上述实现方式，第一终端设备根据接收的第一辅助信息确定是否使能SL DRX配置，也就是，参考了第二终端设备的状态或需求后确定是否使能第一侧行链路上的SL DRX配置。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。可选的，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。这里，第一终端设备指示第二终端反馈自身状态或需求。
可选的，该第一辅助反馈指示携带在旁链路控制(sidelink control information，SCI)、媒体接入控制元素(media access control control element，MAC CE)或PC5-无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：该第一终端设备根据第四业务相关信息确定该第一指示信息，该第四业务相关信息为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。例如，该第四业务相关信息可以为业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长或者服务质量(quality of service，QoS)相关信息等。
通过上述实现方式，第一终端设备可以根据第一侧行链路上的业务信息，确定是否使能SL DRX配置，提升了用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一使能指示信息携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一去使能指示信息还包括第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二终端设备根据该第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一去使能指示信息携带在SCI、媒体接入控制元素MAC CE或PC5-无线资源控制RRC消息中。这里，第一去使能指示信息具有灵活的携带方法。
可选的，第一指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。其中旁链路的标识包括旁链路连接的标识(sidelink connection ID)或者旁链路的链路标识(SL link identifier或PC5link identifier)。即，该第一指示信息中还可以包括第一侧行链路的标识，或第一通信设备(第一终端设备)的标识、或第二通信设备(第二终端设备)、或通信设备对(终端设备对)的标识，也就是，第一终端设备和第二终端设备组成的终端设备对的标识。通过该实现方式，可以标识该指示信息对应的侧行链路，或者，该指示信息对应的终端设备，有利于指示信息与侧行链路之间的对应。
容易理解的，本申请中，旁链路(sidelink)也可以是PC5。终端设备功率节省信号可以是DCP(DCI scrambled by PS-RNTI(power saving radio network tempory identity))，或者唤醒信号(Wake up signal，WUS)，或者GTS(go-to-sleep signal)等其他功率节省信号。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与 SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，第一指示信息与SL UPSS使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在第一指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和第一指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
第二方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路选择的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备根据该第一指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。第二终端设备通过接收第一终端设备的第一指示信息，获取第一终端设备是否为第一侧行链路使能了SL DRX配置，以保证在第一侧行链路使能上与第一终端设备一致。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，该第一辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。第二终端设备向第一终端设备提供与SL DRX配置相关的辅助信息，有利于第一终端设备根据该与SL DRX配置相关的辅助信息为第一侧行链路确定是否使能SL DRX配置，提高了SL DRX配置的效率。这里，第二终端设备向第一终端设备反馈状态或需求，为第一终端设备确定第一指示信息做参考。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备接收第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。可选的，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
可选的，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一辅助反馈指示信息，或者，第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一辅助反馈指示信息。第二终端设备根据该第一辅助反馈指示信息确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
通过上述实现方式，通过接收第一辅助反馈指示信息触发向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，为第一终端设备确定第一指示信息做参考。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，该SL DRX配置相关辅助信息为与SL DRX配置相关的辅助参考信息。
可选的，第二终端设备在某次向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息时，启动定时器T1。
可选的，如下一个或多个条件满足时，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息：
第二终端设备当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或多项值与前一次反馈的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的对应项值不同、与对应项值的差值超过预设门限、定时器T1不在运行、电量充足且当前SL DRX生效、或者电量不充足或者电量过低且当前SL DRX未生效。
第二终端设备根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息触发向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，为第一终端设备确定第一指示信息做参考。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一指示信息包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一使能指示信息携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一指示信息包括： 第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一去使能指示信息还包括第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二终端设备根据该第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第一去使能指示信息携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中。
第三方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：网络设备确定第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为该第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为该第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该第二指示信息。
通过上述方法，网络设备为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路确定SL DRX配置的使能操作，提升了SL DRX配置的效率和用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一业务相关信息，该第一业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息；网络设备根据该第一业务相关信息确定第二指示信息。例如，该第一业务相关信息可以包括：业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长等。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一业务相关反馈指示信息，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；网络设备根据第二辅助信息确定第二指示信息。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第二辅助信息。
通过上述实现方式，网络设备根据第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息和第二终端设备的辅助信息，也就是说，网络设备参考了第一终端设备和第二终端设备的状态为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路确定SL DRX配置的使能操作，提升了SL DRX配置的效率和用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向网络设备发送SL DRX相关的辅助信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二使能指示信息携带在下行控制(downlink control information，DCI)消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二去使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息还包括第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息携带在DCI消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
可选的，该第二指示信息为SL DRX配置信息，或者，第二指示信息包含在SL DRX配置信息中。
可选的，第二指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。即，该第二指示信息中还可以包括第一侧行链路的标识，或第一通信设备(第一终端设备)的标识、或第二通信设备(第二终端设备)、或通信设备对(终端设备对)的标识，也就是，第一终端设备和第二终端设备组成的终端设备对的标识。通过该实现方式，可以标识该指示信息对应的侧行链路，或者，该指示信息对应的终端设备，有利于指示信息与侧行链路之间的对应。
第四方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第二指示信息。
通过上述方法，第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作的指示信息之后，向第二终端设备发送该指示信息，以利于第二终端设备获取该指示信息的内容，提高了DRX配置的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息，该第一业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。例如，该第一业务相关信息可以包括：业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长等。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一业务相关反馈指示信息，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第二辅助信息，该第二辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二辅助信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备发送第二辅助信息。
通过上述实现方式，第一终端设备通过第一业务相关信息和/或第二辅助信息向网络设备反馈第一终端设备和第二终端设备的状态和节省功耗需求。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息包括：第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二使能指示信息携带在DCI消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息包括：第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二去使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息还包括第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息携带在DCI消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，第二指示信息与SL UPSS使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在第二指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和第二指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
第五方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备根据第二指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
通过上述方法，第二终端设备根据第一终端设备发送的为第一侧行链路确定SL DRX配置的使能操作的指示信息为该第一侧行链路确定使能操作，以便于第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间进行SL DRX配置的信息的对齐。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息，该第二辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。第二终端设备向第一终端设备提供与SL DRX配置相关的辅助信息，有利于第一终端设备根据该与SL DRX配置相关的辅助信息为第一侧行链路确定是否使能SL DRX配置，提高了SL DRX配置的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备接收第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。
可选的，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二辅助反馈指示信息，或者，第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第二辅助反馈指示信息。
通过上述实现方式，通过接收第二辅助反馈指示信息触发向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息，为第一终端设备确定二指示信息做参考。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息确定向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息，该SL DRX配置相关辅助信息为与SL DRX配置相关的辅助参考信息。
可选的，第二终端设备在向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息时，启动定时器T2，
可选的，如下一个或多个条件满足时，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息：
第二终端设备当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或多项值与前一次反馈的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的对应项值不同、与对应项值的差值超过预设门限、定时器T2不在运行、电量充足且当前SL DRX生效、或者电量不充足或者电量过低且当前SL DRX未生效。
通过上述实现方式，第二终端设备根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息触发向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息，为第一终端设备确定第二指示信息做参考。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二指示信息包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二使能指示信息携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二指示信息包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二去使能指示信息，该第二去使能指示信息用于指 示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息还包括第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二终端设备根据该第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第二去使能指示信息携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中。
第六方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备确定第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。
通过上述方法，第二终端设备确定第一侧行链路的使能操作之后向第一终端发送第三指示信息，以利于第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间SL DRX配置的使能一致。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第三辅助信息，该第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。第二终端设备根据第三辅助信息确定第三指示信息。在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备根据第二终端设备的业务相关信息确定第三指示信息，该第二终端设备的业务相关信息包括发送业务的需求。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三使能指示信息，该第三使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三去使能指示信息，该第三去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第三去使能指示信息还包括第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
可选的，第三指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。即，该第三指示信息中还可以包括第一侧行链路的标识，或第一通信设备(第一终端设备)的标识、或第二通信设备(第二终端设备)、或通信设备对(终端设备对)的标识，也就是，第一终端设备和第二终端设备组成的终端设备对的标识。通过该实现方式，可以标识该指示信息对应的侧行链路，或者，该指示信息对应的终端设备，有利于指示信息与侧行链路之间的对应。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，第三指示信息与SL UPSS使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在第三指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和第三指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
第七方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第一终端设备根据第三指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
通过上述方法，第一终端设备根据接收到的第三指示信息与第二终端设备保持SL DRX使能一致。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第三辅助相关信息，该第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三指示信息，包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三使能指示信息，该第三使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三指示信息，包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三去使能指示信息，该第三去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该第三去使能指示信息还包括第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
第八方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备确定第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，该SL DRX周期调整指示信息用于调整第一侧行链路的SL DRX周期，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送该第一信息。
可选的，第二终端设备根据第三业务相关信息确定第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关，该第三业务相关信息为所述第二终端设备的业务相关信息。
可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值和SL DRX周期基准值。
可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值。
通过上述方法，第二终端设备向第一终端发送的第一信息，用于调整SL DRX周期，提升用户体验。
第九方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息用于调整第一侧行链路的SL DRX周期，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；第一终端设备根据该一信息进行SL DRX周期调整。
可选的，第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，该SL DRX周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第一信息还包括SL DRX周期基准值。
可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值和SL DRX周期基准值。
可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值。
通过上述方法，第一终端设备通过接收第二终端发送的第一信息调整SL DRX周期，提升用户体验。
第十方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第一终端设备确定第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路终端设备功率节省信号SL UPSS配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息。
通过上述方法，第一终端设备为第一侧行链路确定SL UPSS配置的使能操作，有利于第一终端设备和第二终端设备的保持SL UPSS配置的使能一致。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备的第四 辅助信息，该第四辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；第一终端设备根据该第四辅助信息确定第四指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第四辅助反馈指示信息，该第四辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四辅助信息。
通过上述方法，第一终端设备通过参考第二终端设备的状态和/或需求为第一侧行链路确定SL UPSS配置的使能操作。
可选的，第四指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。即，该第四指示信息中还可以包括第一侧行链路的标识，或第一通信设备(第一终端设备)的标识、或第二通信设备(第二终端设备)、或通信设备对(终端设备对)的标识，也就是，第一终端设备和第二终端设备组成的终端设备对的标识。通过该实现方式，可以标识该指示信息对应的侧行链路，或者，该指示信息对应的终端设备，有利于指示信息与侧行链路之间的对应。
第十一方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能SL UPSS配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备根据第四指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四辅助信息，该第四辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送第四辅助反馈指示信息，该第四辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四辅助信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，同步指示信息与SL DRX使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在SL DRX指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和SL DRX指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
第十二方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：网络设备确定第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置的使能操作，该使能操作包括为该第一侧行链路使能SL UPSS配置，或者，为该第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，该第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该第五指示信息。网络设备确定第五指示信息的方式可参考第三方面中网络设备确定第二指示信息的方式，所不同的是，将SL DRX配置替换为SL UPSS配置。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第五业务相关信息，该第五业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息；网络设备根据该第五业务相关信息确定第五指示信息。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：网络设备向第一终端发送第五业务相关反馈指示信息，该第五业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第五业务相关信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：该网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第 五辅助信息，该第五辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；网络终端设备根据该第五辅助信息确定第五指示信息。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第五辅助信息。该第五辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，第五指示信息与SL DRX使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在第五指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和第五指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
以上第十二方面的可能的设计的有益效果，可参照第三方面的可能的设计的有益效果的描述。
第十三方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二终端设备确定第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL UPSS配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路；第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第六指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第六辅助信息，该第六辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。第二终端设备根据该第六辅助信息中的业务相关信息和/或资源配置信息确定第六指示信息
可选的，该通信方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第六辅助反馈指示信息，该第六辅助反馈指示信息用于指示向第二终端设备发送第六辅助信息。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，第六指示信息与SL DRX使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在第六指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和第六指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
第二终端设备确定第六指示信息的方式可参考第六方面中第二终端设备确定第三指示信息的方式，所不同的是，将SL DRX配置替换为SL UPSS配置。
以上第十三方面的可能的设计的有益效果，可参照第六方面的可能的设计的有益效果的描述。
第十四方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二通信设备确定业务需求信息，该业务需求信息包括第二通信设备需要发送业务或第二通信设备不需要发送业务；第二通信设备根据业务需求确定第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以根据业务需求，灵活的确定第三指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，第三指示信息用于指示为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。如果第二通信设备判断有业务需要发送时，通过去使能SL DRX配置保证业务的发送。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元 内采用随机选择获取资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以及时的获取用于发送业务的资源。本申请实施例中的时间单元可以为秒，毫秒，符号，时隙等。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源且启动感知。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源，并且在所述t个时间单元结束后确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知(full sensing)或部分感知(partial sensing)。可选的，第二通信设备可以在确定需要发送业务后就开始启动感知，或者，也可以在确定需要发送业务后的一段时间(例如，几个符号后)开始启动感知。通过该方式，t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源，在t个时间单元结束后确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，确保了可以及时获取用于发送业务的资源。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源且启动感知，并且在所述t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知或部分感知。通过该方式，t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源但同时进行感知，在t个时间单元结束后确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，确保了可以获取用于发送业务的资源。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，启动感知。可选的，在第二通信设备获得感知结果之前，第二通信设备采用随机选择的方式获取资源，和/或，在第二通信设备获得感知结果之后，第二通信设备基于感知结果获取或确定资源。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以确定灵活的资源获取方式，确保了可以获取用于发送业务的资源。
可选的，通信设备需要发送业务包括但不限于：通信设备被配置进行SL通信(is configured to perfrom sidelink communication)，通信设备被配置发送SL通信(transmit sidelink communication)，或通信设备感兴趣进行SL通信，或通信设备感兴趣发送SL通信(transmit sidelink communication)。
第十五方面，提供了一种配置使能方法，包括：第二通信设备确定业务需求信息，该业务需求信息包括第二通信设备需要发送业务或第二通信设备不需要发送业务；第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，第二通信设备确定为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以根据业务需求，灵活的确定第一侧行链路的SL DRX配置使能方式。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二通信设备确定第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以根据业务需求，灵活的确定第三指示信息。
在一种可能的方式中，第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，指示低层(lower layer)为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。其中，所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务包括：第二通信设备的上层(upper layer)确定需要发送业务。也就是说，第二通信设备的上层可以向低层发送第三指示信息，用于指示所述第一侧行链路的SL DRX的使能操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，第三指示信息用于指示为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。如果第二通信设备判断有业务需要发送时，通过去 使能SL DRX配置保证业务的发送。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以及时获取用于发送业务的资源。本申请实施例中的时间单元可以为秒，毫秒，符号，时隙等。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源且启动感知。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源，并且在所述t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知(full sensing)或部分感知(partial sensing)。可选的，第二通信设备可以在确定需要发送业务后就开始启动感知，或者，也可以在确定需要发送业务后的一段时间(例如，几个符号后)开始启动感知。通过该方式，t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源，在t个时间单元结束后确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，确保了可以及时获取用于发送业务的资源。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源且启动感知，并且在所述t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知或部分感知。通过该方式，t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源但同时进行感知，在t个时间单元结束后确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，确保了可以及时获取用于发送业务的资源。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，启动感知。可选的，在第二通信设备获得感知结果之前，第二通信设备采用随机选择的方式获取资源，和/或，在第二通信设备获得感知结果之后，第二通信设备基于感知结果获取或确定资源。通过该方式，第二通信设备可以确定灵活的资源获取方式，确保了可以及时获取用于发送业务的资源，进一步减少时延，提高通信质量。
可选的，通信设备需要发送业务包括但不限于：通信设备被配置进行SL通信，通信设备被配置发送SL通信，或通信设备感兴趣进行SL通信，或通信设备感兴趣发送SL通信。
第十六方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置包括用于执行上述第一至第十五方面或第一至第十五方面方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十七方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器和接口电路，接口电路用于接收来自该通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至该处理器或将来自该处理器的信号发送给该通信装置之外的其它通信装置，该处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现前述第一至第二方面或第一至第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法，或者，用于实现前述第四至第十一方面或第四至第十一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法，或者，用于实现前述第十三至第十五方面或第十三至第十五方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十八方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收来自该通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至该处理器或将来自该处理器的信号发送给该通信装置之外的其它通信装置，该处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现前述第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法，或者，用于实现前述第十二方面或第十二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十九方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令，当该计算机程序或指令被执行时，实现上述第一至第二方面或第四至第十一方面或第十五方面中的任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第二十方面，提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该指令被运行时，实现上述第三或第十二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第二十一方面，提供了一种通信芯片，其中存储有指令，当其在计算机设备上运行时，使得所述通信芯片执行上述第一方面至第十五方面中的任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第二十二方面，提供了一种通信系统，该通信系统包括前述第十七方面的通信装置和/或第十八方面的通信装置。
附图说明
图1为本申请提供的实施例应用的通信系统的示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法200的交互示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法300的交互示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法400的交互示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法500的交互示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法600的交互示意图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
首先，对本申请提供的技术方案可适用的通信系统进行说明。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)系统或新无线(new radio，NR)、设备到设备(device to device，D2D)系统、车联网(vehicle to everything，V2X)系统等。
V2X是指通过装载在车辆上的传感器及电子标签等等来实现环境感知、信息交互与协同控制的重要关键技术。比如，该技术可实现车与互联网(vehicle to network，V2N)、车与车(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)、车与人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)和车与基础设施通信(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)之间的信息交互等，可提升车辆的智能化水平和自动驾驶能力。
V2N的一个参与者是终端设备，另一个参与者是服务实体。V2N是目前应用最广泛的车联网形式，其主要功能是使车辆通过移动网络连接到云服务器，从而通过云服务器提供导航、娱乐、防盗等功能。
V2V的两个参与者都是终端设备。V2V可以用作车辆间信息交互提醒，最典型的应用是用于车辆间防碰撞安全系统。
V2P的两个参与者都是终端设备。V2P可用作给道路上的行人或非机动车提供安全警告。
V2I中一个参与者是终端设备，另一个参与者是基础设施(或道路设施)。V2I可用作车辆与基础设施的通信，例如，基础设施可以是道路、交通灯、路障等，可以获取交通灯信号 时序等道路管理信息。
本申请实施例中的第一通信设备(第一终端设备)和第二通信设备(第二终端设备)可以指用户设备(user equipment，UE)、用户站(subscriber station，SS)、客户端设备(customer Premise Equipment，CPE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(sessioninitiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。终端设备还可以是部署在自动驾驶汽车、智能汽车、数字汽车或车辆网汽车中的软件和/或硬件模块。本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指D2D设备，V2X设备。
本申请实施例中的第三通信设备(网络设备)可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备可以是全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications，GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB，NB)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备(gNB)或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，本申请实施例并不限定。在一种网络结构中，网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。本申请实施例中的网络设备可以指路边站单元(road side unit，RSU)。
在一些部署中，基站或传输点还可以包括射频单元(radio unit，RU)。CU实现gNB或传输点的部分功能，DU实现gNB或传输点的部分功能，比如，CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能，DU实现无线链路控制(radiolink control，RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息，或者，由PHY层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令或PHCP层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU+RU发送的。可以理解的是，网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外，CU可以划分为接入网RAN中的网络设备，也可以将CU划分为核心网CN中的网络设备，在此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备 或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
图1示例性的给出了一种可能的通信系统结构示意图。如图1所示，该系统架构包括：终端设备(包括第一终端设备和第二终端设备)和网络设备。终端设备间通过PC5接口实现通信。终端设备间的直连通信链路可以称之为侧行链路(sidelink，SL)。第一终端设备与网络设备之间通过Uu口实现通信。
可选地，图1中的系统架构还可以包括V2X应用服务器(application server)。
在无线通信网络中，终端设备并不是一直在和网络设备或其他终端设备进行有效信息的交互，不会总是执行上传或者下载业务，通话时也不会一直有语音数据的传输。因此，可以通过配置非连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)，可以让终端设备周期性的在某些时候进入睡眠状态，终端设备不需要连续地监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，而需要监听的时候，则从睡眠状态中唤醒，从而达到节省终端设备功耗的效果。然而，在V2X场景下，现有技术中在进行DRX配置时较少的考虑到DRX配置的使能机制、接收端终端设备的状态或需求以及发送终端设备与接收终端设备之间的业务相关信息。其中，本申请实施例中的旁链路非连续接收(sidelink discontinuous reception，SL DRX)配置包括如下至少一个：
·drx-onDurationTimerSL；
·drx-InactivityTimerSL；
·drx-RetransmissionTimerSL；
·drx-LongCycleSL；
·drx-LongCycleStartOffsetSL；
·drx-ShortCycleSL；
·drx-ShortCycleTimerSL；
·drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL；
·drx-SlotOffsetSL；
·drx-StartOffsetSL。
下面将结合图2至图6描述本申请实施例的通信方法。
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法200的交互示意图。可以理解，图2中的第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以是图1中的终端设备，也可以是终端设备中的装置(例如处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等)。还可理解，图2中第一终端设备设备与第二终端设备设备之间交互的部分或全部信息，可以携带于已有的消息、信道、信号或信令中，也可以是新定义的消息、信道、信号或信令，对此不作具体限定。如图2所示，该方法200包括：
S230：第一终端设备确定第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去 使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
其中，“为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作”中的“确定”可以等价替换为“配置”、“选择”或者“设置”等等，本申请实施例并不限定。
在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备参与确定第一侧行链路的使能操作，并将确定的第一侧行链路的使能操作通过第一指示信息发送给第二终端设备。其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端为接收端，第一终端设备与网络设备连接。
可选的，第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作包括：第一指示信息包括第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息用于指示为该第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置；或者，第一指示信息包括第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息用于指示为该第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该通信方法还包括：该第一终端设备根据第四业务相关信息确定该第一指示信息，该第四业务相关信息为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。例如，该第四业务相关信息可以为业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长或者服务质量(quality of service，QoS)相关信息。
可选的，该方法200还包括：S220第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第一辅助信息，该第一辅助信息包括该第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。本申请实施例中，第一辅助信息中的包含的信息可以在一条第一辅助信息中，也可以在多条第一辅助信息中，也就是说，这些信息可以包含在一条第一辅助信息中一起发送，也可以在多条第一辅助信息中单独或组合发送。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息确定第一指示信息。
举例来说，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的电量百分比信息大于预设门限时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第一辅助信息中的电量百分比信息小于预设门限时，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量充足时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第一辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量不充足或者电量过低时，确定使能SL DRX配置。容易理解的，电量充足的判断条件可以是和预设电量比较。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的电量等级大于预设等级确定去使能SL DRX配置；如果第一辅助信息中的电量等级小于预设等级时，则确定使能SL DRX配置。即，第一终端设备根据电量的等级判断电量状态，进一步确定是否使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的建议的SL DRX配置确定使能或者去使能SL DRX配置，例如，可以根据建议的SL DRX配置中的周期进行判断，如果周期太短则去使能SL DRX配置，或者，根据建议的SL DRX配置确定第二终端设备的需求，根据该需求确定SL DRX配置的使能操作。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为非省电型时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第一辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为省电型时，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的空内容的SL DRX调整值信息，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。容易理解的，第一终端设备也可以根据第一辅助 信息中的空内容的SL DRX调整值信息，确定使能SL DRX配置。也就是说，空内容的SL DRX调整值信息的可以是使能的触发条件也可以是去使能的触发条件，该规则由第一终端设备确定或预定义。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第一辅助信息中的去使能SL DRX配置指示信息，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端设备根据第一侧行链路的业务特性确定第一指示信息。
举例来说，当第一终端设备判断业务周期小于预设阈值时，或者，单位时间内业务量大于预设阈值时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。该预设阈值可以是第一终端设备确定的，或者，该预设阈值是预先配置的，或者，该预设阈值是协议规定的。第一终端设备也可以根据QoS信息确定去使能SL DRX配置信息，例如，当业务QoS信息中的优先级高于预定门限时，或者时延要求小于预定门限(即业务要求的最低时延小区预定门限)时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，方法200还包括：S210第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。SL DRX配置相关辅助信息包括该第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、建议的SL DRX配置、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种
可选的，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
可选的，第一辅助反馈指示信息可以包括第二终端设备的标识。
可选的，该第一辅助反馈指示携带在SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息中，例如，可以携带在PC5-RRC重配消息中。
可选的，一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。或者，网络设备预先配置第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息，也就是说，第二终端设备可以自主根据网络设备的配置确定发送第一辅助信息。
本申请实施例中，第二终端设备有多种可行的实现方式确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
一种第二终端设备确定发送第一辅助信息的实现方式中，第二终端设备根据第一终端设备发送的第一辅助反馈指示信息确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
又一种第二终端设备确定发送第一辅助信息的实现方式中，第二终端设备根据网络设备发送的第一辅助反馈指示信息确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
再一种第二终端设备确定发送第一辅助信息的实现方式中，第二终端设备根据网络设备的配置确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。也就是说，网络设备配置第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
又一种第二终端设备确定发送第一辅助信息的实现方式中，当第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息时，第二终端设备启动定时器(timer1，T1)，
可选的，当如下一个或多个条件满足时，第二终端设备确定发送第一辅助信息。
条件一：第二终端设备当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或者多项与前一次反馈的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的对应项不同时，也就是说当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或者多项发生变化时，且变化量超出预设门限时，第二终端设备确定向第一终端设备发送第一 辅助信息，容易理解的，该第一辅助信息可以携带该变化项，或者该变化项的变化量。比如，第二终端设备当前电量百分比比前一次反馈的电量百分比下降50％时，第二终端设备可以向第一终端设备发送当前电量百分下降的信息。
条件二：第二终端设备电量充足，且当前SL DRX配置生效时，第二终端设备确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
条件三：第二终端设备电量不充足或者过低，且当前SL DRX配置未生效时，第二终端设备确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
条件四：第二终端设备具有省电需求时，第二终端设备确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息。
条件五：定时器T1不在运行。
S240，第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作。相应的，第二终端设备接收该第一指示信息，并根据该第一指示信息为第一侧行链路进行SL DRX配置使能操作。
可选的，第一指示信息包括第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。该第一使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息，比如(sidelink control information，SCI)、媒体接入控制元素(media access control control element，MAC CE)或PC5-无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息。
可选的，第一使能指示信息可以为SL DRX配置信息，或者，第一使能指示信息携带在SL DRX配置信息中。
可选的，第一指示信息包括第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。该第一去使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息，比如SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息。
可选的，第一去使能指示信息还包括第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二终端设备根据该第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。本申请实施例中，第一终端设备通过参考业务相关信息和/或第二终端设备反馈的辅助信息，为第一侧行链路确定SL DRX配置的使能操作之后向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，保证第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间SL DRX配置使能一致，根据第二终端设备的状态和/或需求进行SL DRX的使能配置。
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法300的交互示意图。可理解，图3中设备与设备之间交互的部分或全部信息，可以携带于已有的消息、信道、信号或信令中，也可以是新定义的消息、信道、信号或信令，对此不作具体限定。该方法300包括：
S340：网络设备确定第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的SL DRX配置使能操作。第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
可选的，该方法300还包括：S330，该网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第一业务相关信息，该第一业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息；网络设备根据该第一业务相关信息确定第二指示信息。例如，该第一业务相关信息可以包括：业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长等。也就是说，第一终端设备向网络设备反馈业务相关信息，以供网络设备参考。可选的，该第一业务相关信息携带在DCI消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
可选的，该通信方法300还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一业务相关反馈指示 信息，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息。可选的，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息携带在DCI消息、MAC CE消息或RRC消息中。
一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备根据该第一业务相关信息确定该第二指示信息。
可选的，示例性的，当网络设备判断业务周期小于预设阈值时，或者，单位时间内业务量大于预设阈值时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。该预设阈值可以是网络设备确定的，或者，该预设阈值是预先配置的，或者，该预设阈值是协议规定的。
可选的，该方法300还包括：S320，该网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二辅助信息，该第二辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
一种可能的实现方式中，网络设备根据该第二辅助信息确定该第二指示信息。
举例来说，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的电量百分比信息大于预设门限时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第二辅助信息中的电量百分比信息小于预设门限时，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量充足时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第二辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量不充足时，确定使能SL DRX配置。容易理解的，电量充足、电量不充足或电量过低的判断条件可以是和预设电量比较。
可选的，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的电量等级大于预设等级确定去使能SL DRX配置；如果第二辅助信息中的电量等级小于预设等级时，则确定使能SL DRX配置。即，网络设备根据电量的等级判断电量状态，进一步确定是否使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为非省电型时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，如果第二辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为省电型时，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的空内容的SL DRX调整值信息，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。容易理解的，网络设备也可以根据第二辅助信息中的空内容的SL DRX调整值信息，确定使能SL DRX配置。也就是说，空内容的SL DRX调整值信息的可以是使能的触发条件也可以是去使能的触发条件，该规则由网络设备确定或预定义。
可选的，网络设备根据第二辅助信息中的去使能SL DRX配置指示信息，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该方法还包括第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备发送第二辅助信息。
可选的，该方法还包括网络设备向第二终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备发送第二辅助信息。或者，网络设备配置第二终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该配置可以定义新的消息或信令，也可以是预定义的，或者，也可以是现有消息，比如SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息。
本申请实施例中，第一业务反馈指示信息和第二辅助反馈指示信息可以携带在同一条信息中，或者，也可以分开发送，本申请实施例并不限定。
可选的，该方法300还包括：S310，该第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第二辅助信息，该第二辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配 置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
S350，该网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的SL DRX配置的使能操作。对应的，第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。也就是说，网络设备可以将为第一侧行链路确定的SL DRX配置的使能操作发送给第一终端设备。
S360，该第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第二指示信息，对应的，第二终端设备接收来自第一终端的第二指示信息。也就是说，第一终端设备可以将为第一侧行链路确定的SL DRX配置的使能操作发送给第二终端设备。容易理解的，第一终端设备可以直接向第二终端设备转发在S350中接收的第二指示信息，也可以对S350中接收的第二指示信息预处理后向第二终端设备发送。示例性的，预处理可以包括过滤、合并、拆分等。
可选的，第二指示信息可以包括第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。该第二使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息，比如SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息。
可选的，第二使能指示信息可以为SL DRX配置信息，或者，第二使能指示信息携带在SL DRX配置信息中。
可选的，第二指示信息可以包括第二去使能指示信息，该第二去使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。该第二去使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息，比如SCI、MAC CE或PC5-RRC消息。
可选的，第二去使能指示信息还包括第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第二终端设备根据该第二SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
本申请实施例中，网络设备通过参考业务相关信息和/或第二终端设备反馈的辅助信息，为第一侧行链路确定SL DRX配置的使能操作之后向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，第一终端接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息之后，向第二网络设备发送该第二指示信息，保证第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间SL DRX配置使能一致，根据第二终端设备的状态和/或需求进行SL DRX的使能配置。
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法400的交互示意图。可理解，图4中设备与设备之间交互的部分或全部信息，可以携带于已有的消息、信道、信号或信令中，也可以是新定义的消息、信道、信号或信令，对此不作具体限定。该方法400包括：
S430，第二终端设备确定第三指示信息。该第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
本申请实施例中，第二终端设备确定第三指示信息，可以理解为，第二终端设备确定使能或者去使能SL DRX配置。
一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备根据该第三辅助信息确定第三指示信息。
可选的，该方法400还包括：S420，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第三辅助信息，该第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
可选的，第二终端设备根据该第三辅助信息中的业务相关信息确定第三指示信息，例如，当第二终端设备判断业务周期小于预设阈值时，或者，单位时间内业务量大于预设阈值时，确定去使能SL DRX配置；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置。该预设阈值可以是第二终端设备确定的，或者，该预设阈值是预先配置的，或者，该预设阈值是协议规定的。
可选的，第二终端设备根据该第三辅助信息中的资源配置信息确定第三指示信息，例如当资源配置信息中的资源密集时，则第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，也就是说当配置的资源密集时，第二终端设备业务收发频繁，确定去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该方法还包括：S410第一终端设备接收第三辅助反馈指示信息，该第三辅助反馈指示信息用于指示向第二终端设备发送上述第三辅助信息。
可选的，第一终端设备接收来自第二终端设备的第三辅助反馈指示信息。可以理解为，第二终端设备在确定第三指示信息时，可以指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第三辅助信息，该第三辅助信息包括第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。例如，第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息可以为，业务周期、特定时间内的业务量或者业务持续时长；资源配置信息可以包括资源配置的密集程度等。
可选的，网络设备配置第一终端向第二终端设备发送第三辅助信息。可以理解为，网络设备通过配置信息指示第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第三辅助信息，该配置信息可以是预定义的，或者，是新的信令或消息。
可选的，该方法还包括，第二终端设备自主决策发送第三辅助信息，例如，第二终端设备根据发送业务需求确定第三指示信息。在第二终端设备采用竞争资源(mode2)时，如果第二终端设备不需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定使能SL DRX配置，即，确定第三指示信息为第三使能指示信息；当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，且在前一秒采用随机选择来获取资源，同时启动感知(sensing)。
又一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元采用随机选择来获取资源，t为大于0的整数或小数。可选地，在前述t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源时，启动感知(sensing)；和/或，在t个时间单元结束后，不再采用随机选择来获取资源，而是基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。其中，所述sensing可为full sensing或partial sensing。容易理解的，t个时间单元仅为实例，也可以为N个符号时隙内采用随机选择来获取资源，N为大于0的整数。
可选的，t个时间单元可以是预配置或预定义的，也可以是第二终端设备确定的，也可以是网络设备配置的，本申请实施例并不限定。上述时间单元可以是秒，毫秒，时隙，符号中的一种。例如，t个时间单元可以为100毫秒或1100毫秒或1000毫秒，本申请并不限定。
再一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或启动感知(sensing)。在获得sensing结果之前，采用随机选择来获取资源，和/或，在获得sensing结果后，基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的，本申请实施例随机选择的方式和sensing的方式之间的切换时机也可以是获得sensing结果之后的第一个符号，可以是第n个符号，n为大于0的整数，也就是说，可以是在获取sensing结果后立刻切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源，也可以是在获取sensing结果之后的一段时间后切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的是，本申请实施例中的获取或确定资源也可以理解为选择资源或者重选资源。
容易理解的，本申请实施例中的，通信设备需要发送业务包括但不限于：通信设备被配置进行SL通信，通信设备被配置发送SL通信，或通信设备感兴趣进行SL通信，或通信设备感兴趣发送SL通信，或者其他通信设备确定需要发送业务的情况，本申请并不限定。
触发第二终端设备发送第三辅助信息的具体实现可参考方法200中的描述，本申请实施例并不赘述。
一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备根据节能需信息确定第三指示信息。
可选的，当第二终端设备确定自身电量等级大于预设门限、或第二终端电量充足、或第二终端设备为非省电型终端、或第二终端设备确定无节能需求时，确定去使能SL DRX配置，也就是说此时确定第三指示信息为去使能SL DRX配置类型的指示信息；反之，确定使能SL DRX配置，也就是说此时确定第三指示信息为使能SL DRX配置类型的指示信息。
S440，该第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，对应的，第一终端设备接收该第三指示信息。容易理解的，该第三指示信息可以是在S430中确定之后立刻向第一终端设备发送，也可以在一定周期之后向第一终端设备发送。
可选的，第三指示信息可以包括第三使能指示信息，该第三使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。该第三使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息。
可选的，第三使能指示信息可以为SL DRX配置信息，或者，第三使能指示信息携带在SL DRX配置信息中。
可选的，第三指示信息可以包括第三去使能指示信息，该第三去使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。该第三使能指示信息可以是新定义的消息，或者，也可以是现有消息。
可选的，第三去使能指示信息还包括第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息，该第一终端设备根据该第三SL DRX配置释放指示信息为第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
本申请实施例中第二终端设备可以通过参考多个信息(第一辅助信息、资源配置信息、发送业务需求信息等)确定第三指示信息，也就是说，第二终端设备确定第三指示信息的触发条件有多个，本申请实施例并不限定这些触发条件必须同时满足，可以满足单个触发条件后确定向第一终端设备发送该第三指示信息，也可以满足触发条件的组合(例如，触发条件1和触发条件2)后确定向第一终端设备发送该第三指示信息。
容易理解的，多个触发条件包括前文介绍的触发条件：第二终端设备是否发送业务即是否有发送业务需求、待发业务量是否超越预设门限、业务时长是否超越门限、第二终端设备的电量信息，节能需求信息等，也包括为定时器时长等触发条件。
示例性的，在一种可能的实现方式中，为了避免第二终端设备发送第三指示信息的频率过高，第二终端设备在确定是否为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置之后，有多种可行的方法防止频繁向第一终端设备发送指示使能或者去使能SL DRX配置的信息，换句话说，第二终端设备确定第三指示信息之后，可以判断是否向第一终端设备发送该第三指示信息。
例如，当第二终端设备采用自主资源分配方式(例如，mode 2)时，当是否发送业务即是否有发送业务需求这个触发条件满足时，第二终端设备确定向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。或者，当第二终端设备是否发送业务，即是否有发送业务需求、待发业务量是否超越预设门限，业务持续时长超过预设门限这三个触发条件同时满足时，第二终端设备才确定向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。或者，当第二终端设备是否发送业务即是否有发送业务需求、待发业务量是否超越预设门限、定时器(timer2，T2)不在运行这三个触发条件同时满足时，第二终端设备才确定向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，其中，定时器的T2可以是第二终端设备在向第一终端设备发送指示使能SL DRX配置时启动的。
例如，当第二终端根据是否发送业务确定满足触发使能或去使能SL DRX的条件时，等待一段时间后再通知第一终端设备使能或去使能其与第二终端设备之间的SL DRX配 置。示例性的额，在第二终端设备向第一终端设备指示使能SL DRX配置时，启动定时器T2；后续当根据是否发送业务确定满足触发去使能SL DRX配置的条件时，若T2不在运行，则第二终端设备向第一终端设备指示使能SL DRX配置。
例如，当第二终端设备根据是否发送业务确定满足触发去使能SL DRX的条件时，先仅去使能第二终端侧的SL DRX配置，若待发业务量超过预设门限，或业务持续时长超过预设门限时，指示第一终端设备去使能其与第二终端设备之间的SL DRX配置。
可选的，本申请实施例中，当第二终端设备判断满足去使能的条件时，也就是，确定第三指示信息为第三去使能指示信息时，第二终端设备可以立刻触发去使能第二终端设备侧的SL DRX配置，之后在一定时间或周期后向第一终端设备发送该第三去使能指示信息。通过上述实现方式，当满足去使能的触发条件时，接收端终端设备可以立刻触发去使能接收端的SL DRX配置，等一段时间后再通知发送端终端设备去使能SL DRX配置。
本申请实施例提供的又一种配置使能方法400A中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，通过该方法，第二终端设备可以根据业务需求灵活的确定SL DRX的配置使能操作，该方法包括：
第二终端设备根据业务需求信息确定第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
一种可能的方式中，第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，本申请实施例提供了几种第二终端设备可能的获取资源的方式：
获取资源方式一：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。
获取资源方式二：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，启动感知。
获取资源方式三：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，启动感知，并且，在t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或重选资源。
获取资源方式四：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，在t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或重选资源。容易理解的，第二终端设备可以在t个时间单元结束后立刻启动感知，也可以在t个时间单元结束后的M个时间时间单元后启动感知，M为大于0的整数，本申请并不限定。
可选的，第二终端设备在获得感知结果之前，采用随机选择的方式获取资源，和/或，在第二终端设备获得感知结果之后，该第二终端设备基于感知结果获取或确定资源。
也就是说，一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元采用随机选择来获取资源，t为大于0的整数或小数。可选地，在前述t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源时，启动感知(sensing)；和/或，在t个时间单元结束后，不再采用随机选择来获取资源，而是基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。其中，所述sensing可为full sensing或partial sensing。
再一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或启动感知(sensing)。在获得sensing结果之前，采用随机选择来获取资源，和/或，在获得sensing结果后，基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的，本申请实施例随机选择的方式和sensing的方式之间的切换时机也可以是获得sensing结果之后的第一个符号，可以是第n个符号，n为大于0的整数，也就是说，可以是在获取sensing结果后立刻切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源，也可以是在获取sensing结果之后的一段时间后切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的是，本申请实施例中的获取或确定资源也可以理解为选择资源或者重选资源。
本申请中的t个时间单元可以是预配置或预定义的，也可以是第二终端设备确定的，也可以是网络设备配置的，本申请实施例并不限定。示例性的，时间单元可以是秒，毫秒，时隙，符号中的一种。例如，t个时间单元可以为100毫秒或1100毫秒或1000毫秒，本申请并不限定。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，以使得第一终端设备根据第三指示信息确定第一侧行链路的SL DRX的使能操作，与第二终端设备对齐，保证侧行链路通信的质量。容易理解的，第二通信设备向第一通信设备指示使能SL DRX，有利于降低侧行链路的功耗；另外，第二通信设备向第一通信设备指示去使能SL DRX可以提升第一通信设备的资源调度效率(或资源利用率)，保障第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送的业务质量。
本申请实施例提供的又一种配置使能方法400B中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，通过该方法，第二终端设备可以根据业务需求灵活的确定SL DRX的配置使能操作，该方法包括：
第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
可选的，在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务之前，该方法还可以包括，第二终端设备确定业务需求信息，该业务需求包括第二终端设备需要发送业务或第二终端设备不需要发送业务。
可选的，第二终端设备确定第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。第二终端设备确定第三指示信息可以理解为第二终端设备根据业务需求信息确定该第三指示信息。或者，也可以理解为，第二终端设备接收到其他网元的指示后确定该第三指示信息。
在一种可能的方式中，第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，指示低层(lower layer)为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。其中，所述第二终端设备确定需要发送业务包括：第二终端设备的上层(upper layer)确定需要发送业务。也就是说，第二终端设备的上层可以向低层发送第三指示信息，用于指示所述第一侧行链路的SL DRX的使能操作，该使能操作包括使能SL DRX或者去使能SL DRX。其中，第二终端设备的上层为第二终端设备的低层之上的协议层。例如，上层可以是应用层，低层可以为车辆外联(vehicle to everything,V2X)层或接入层(access stratum，AS)；另一种可能的方式中，上层可以是V2X层，低层可以是接入层。
可选的，第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，本申请实施例提供了几种第二终端设备可能的获取资源的方式：
获取资源方式一：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。
获取资源方式二：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，启动感知。
获取资源方式三：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，启动感知，并且，在t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或重选资源。
获取资源方式四：在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，在t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或重选资源。容易理解的，第二终端设备可以在t个时间单元结束后立刻启动感知，也可以在t个时间单元结束后的M个时间时间单元后启动感知，M为大于0的整数，本申请并不限定。
可选的，第二终端设备在获得感知结果之前，采用随机选择的方式获取资源，和/或，在第二终端设备获得感知结果之后，该第二终端设备基于感知结果获取或确定资源。
也就是说，一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或在第二终端设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元采用随机选择来获取资源，t为大于0的整数或小数。可选地，在前述t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取资源时，启动感知(sensing)；和/或，在t个时间单元结束后，不再采用随机选择来获取资源，而是基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。其中，所述sensing可为full sensing或partial sensing。
再一种可能的方式中，当第二终端设备确定需要发送业务时，第二终端设备确定去使能SL DRX配置，和/或启动感知(sensing)。在获得sensing结果之前，采用随机选择来获取资源，和/或，在获得sensing结果后，基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的，本申请实施例随机选择的方式和sensing的方式之间的切换时机也可以是获得sensing结果之后的第一个符号，可以是第n个符号，n为大于0的整数，也就是说，可以是在获取sensing结果后立刻切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源，也可以是在获取sensing结果之后的一段时间后切换为基于sensing结果来获取或确定资源。容易理解的是，本申请实施例中的获取或确定资源也可以理解为选择资源或者重选资源。
本申请中的t个时间单元可以是预配置或预定义的，也可以是第二终端设备确定的，也可以是网络设备配置的，本申请实施例并不限定。示例性的，时间单元可以是秒，毫秒，时隙，符号中的一种。例如，t个时间单元可以为100毫秒或1100毫秒或1000毫秒，本申请并不限定。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息，以使得第一终端设备根据第三指示信息确定第一侧行链路的SL DRX的使能操作，与第二终端设备对齐，保证侧行链路通信的质量。容易理解的，第二通信设备向第一通信设备指示使能SL DRX，有利于降低侧行链路的功耗；另外，第二通信设备向第一通信设备指示去使能SL DRX可以提升第一通信设备的资源调度效率(或资源利用率)，保障第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送的业务质量。
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法500的交互示意图。可理解，图5中设备与设备之间交互的部分或全部信息，可以携带于已有的消息、信道、信号或信令中，也可以是 新定义的消息、信道、信号或信令，对此不作具体限定。该方法500包括：
S510，第二终端设备确定第一信息。该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息用于调整第一侧行链路的SL DRX周期，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
一种可能的方式中，第二终端设备根据第三业务相关信息确定第一信息。该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关，该第三业务相关信息为第二终端设备的业务相关信息。
可选的，第三业务相关信息包括当前业务的时延要求信息、实际传输情况信息、或者当前时延预算(delay budget)等，其中实际传输情况信息可以包括业务到达时间信息，也就是说，第二终端设备可以根据当前业务的时延要求、时延预算和实际传输情况中的一种或多种确定SL DRX周期调整值。
可选的，一种可能的实现方式中，周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关，可以理解为，周期调整指示信息包括周期调整值和周期基准值。其中，周期基准值可以理解为周期调整的基本单元，例如，基准值为20、40、60…；调整值可以为0或1；当调整值为1时，表示增加一倍的基准值，当调整值为0时，表示减少一倍的基准值。可以理解的，周期调整值和周期基准值也可以有其他对应规则，例如，基准值与调整值之间存在函数关系，本申请实施例并不限定。
可选的，一种可能的实现方式中，周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关，可以理解为，周期调整指示信息包括周期调整值，周期基准值是预先配置的，周期调整值与周期基准值存在对应关系。本申请实施例中，周期基准值有多种预先配置的实现方式，一种可以是预配置或预定义。另一种预先配置的实现方式中可以是通过RRC重配消息、或MAC CE或SCI配置指示。可选的，网络设备先配置或指示给第一终端设备，再由第一终端设备配置或指示第二终端设备，或者，由第一终端设备配置或指示第二终端设备，或者由第二终端设备配置或指示第一终端设备，本申请实施例并不限定。
例如，第一终端设备和第二终端设备预先配置好上述周期基准值，第一信息中包含周期调整值，该周期调整值与预先配置好的周期基准值有关(对应关系)。
S520，第二终端设备向第一终端发送该第一信息。相应的，第一终端接收该第一信息，并根据该第一信息进行SL DRX周期调整。
本申请实施例中，通过将SL DRX周期调整量分解为两个参数(周期调整值和周期基准值)，克服了终端设备反馈信息量的限制，提升了用户体验。
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法600的交互示意图。可理解，图6中设备与设备之间交互的部分或全部信息，可以携带于已有的消息、信道、信号或信令中，也可以是新定义的消息、信道、信号或信令，对此不作具体限定。该方法600包括：
S620，第一终端设备确定第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路终端设备功率节省信号(sidelink user equipment saving signal，SL UPSS)配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
可选的，方法600还包括：S610，第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第四辅助信息，该第四辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；第一终端设备根据该第四辅助信息确 定第四指示信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，方法600还包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第四辅助反馈指示信息，该第四辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四辅助信息。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第四辅助信息确定第四指示信息。
举例来说，第一终端设备根据第四辅助信息中的电量百分比信息大于预设门限时，确定去使能SL UPSS配置；反之，如果第四辅助信息中的电量百分比信息小于预设门限时，确定使能SL UPSS配置。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第四辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量充足时，确定去使能SL UPSS配置；反之，如果第四辅助信息中的电量充足指示信息指示电量不充足或者电量过低时，确定使能SL UPSS配置。容易理解的，电量充足的判断条件可以是和预设电量比较。
可选的，第一终端设备根据第四辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为非省电型时，确定去使能SL UPSS配置；反之，如果第四辅助信息中的终端设备的省电类型信息为省电型时，确定使能SL UPSS配置。
可选的，该第四指示信息中还包括同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。
S630，第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息。相应的，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第四指示信息。
本申请实施例中，第一终端设备参考第二终端设备反馈的辅助信息确定第四指示信息，用于指示第一侧行链路的SL UPSS配置的使能操作，保证了第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的SL UPSS配置使能一致。
本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法700，该方法700包括：
S740：网络设备确定第五指示信息。该第五指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的SL UPSS配置使能操作。第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
可选的，该方法700还包括：S730，该网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第五业务相关信息，该第五业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息；网络设备根据该第五业务相关信息确定第五指示信息。该第五业务相关信息的发送和携带方式可参考S330中相关描述。
可选的，该通信方法700还包括：网络设备向第一终端发送第五业务相关反馈指示信息，该第五业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第五业务相关信息。容易理解的，该第五业务相关反馈指示信息和方法300中的第一业务相关反馈指示信息可以为一条信息，也可以是多条信息。
可选的，该通信方法700还包括：S720，该网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第五辅助信息，该第五辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；网络设备根据该第五辅助信息确定第五指示信息。实现方法与S320中的描述类似，本申请实施例不再赘述。
可选的，该通信方法700还包括：S710，该第一终端设备接收第二终端设备发送的第五辅助信息，该第五辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX 配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
S750，该网络设备向第一终端设备发送第五指示信息，第五指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的SL UPSS配置的使能操作。对应的，第一终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息。也就是说，网络设备可以将为第一侧行链路确定的SL UPSS配置的使能操作发送给第一终端设备。
S760，该第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第五指示信息，对应的，第二终端设备接收来自第一终端的第五指示信息。也就是说，第一终端设备可以将为第一侧行链路确定的SL DRX配置的使能操作发送给第二终端设备。
S750和S760的实现方式可参考S350和S360中的描述。
本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法800，该方法800包括：
S830，第二终端设备确定第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路，其中，第一终端设备为发送端，第二终端设备为接收端。
本申请实施例中，第二终端设备确定第六指示信息，可以理解为，第二终端设备确定使能或者去使能SL UPSS配置。
可选的，该方法800还包括：S820，第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第六辅助信息，该第六辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
可选的，第二终端设备根据该第六辅助信息中的业务相关信息和/或资源配置信息确定第六指示信息的方式可以参考方法400中S420中的描述。
可选的，该方法还包括：S810，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第六辅助反馈指示信息，相应的，第一终端设备接收第六辅助反馈指示信息。与方法400中S410中的实现方式类似。
S840、该第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第六指示信息，对应的，第一终端设备接收该第六指示信息。该第六指示信息的发送方式与S440中的描述类似，容易理解的，本申请实施例中的第三指示信息和第六指示信息可以是独立的信息，也可以是一条信息，也就是说，可以同时指示SL DRX和SL UPSS的使能操作。
本申请实施例中，用于使能配置(SL DRX配置和/或SL UPSS配置)的指示信息(第一指示信息、第二指示信息、第三指示信息和/或第四指示信息)还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。即，该第一指示信息中还可以包括第一侧行链路的标识，或第一通信设备(第一终端设备)的标识、或第二通信设备(第二终端设备)的标识、或通信设备对(终端设备对)的标识，也就是，第一终端设备和第二终端设备组成的终端设备对的标识。
可选的，上述用于使能配置的指示信息也可以与对应的标识信息分开发送，也就是说，两者可以是一条信息，也可以是包含在多条信息中，本申请实施例并不限定。
其中，用于使能配置的指示信息包括上述第一终端设备确定的第一指示信息、第二终端设备确定的第二指示信息、网络设备确定的第三指示信息和/或第一终端设备确定的第四指示信息，即在本申请实施例中，当网络设备向某个发送端UE、或发送端UE向某个接收端UE、或接收端UE向某个发送端UE指示使能(enable)/去使能(disable)SL DRX配置和/或SL UPSS配置时，同时指示对应的SL链路标识(SL link identifier)，或单个UE ID，或UE ID对。
本申请实施例中，单个通信设备(例如，第一终端设备)的标识可包括临时移动用户标识(serving-temporary mobile subscriber identity，S-TMSI)、国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identity，IMSI)、用户隐藏标识(subscription permanent identifier，SUPI)、全球唯一临时UE标识(globally unique temporary UE identity，GUTI)或第一通信装置的层1标识(或层2标识)中的一个或多个。第二终端设备的标识可包括第二终端设备的S-TMSI、IMSI、SUPI、GUTI或第二终端设备的层1标识(或层2标识)中的一个。
当终端设备的标识(identity，ID)采用层1标识(L1 UE ID)或层2标识(L2 UE ID)时，终端设备对的标识可包括源(source)层2标识，目的(destination)层2标识：{source L2 ID,destination L2 ID}；或者，终端设备对的标识可包括源层1标识，目的层1标识：{source L1ID,destination L1ID}。
可选的，对于SL单播时，上述使能配置的指示信息包括的标识可以为第二终端设备的标识、或UE ID对中的目标层1或层2标识为第二终端设备的标识。
可选的，对于SL组播或SL广播，上述使能配置的指示信息包括的标识可以为该SL组播或SL广播业务关联的destination L2 ID或destination L1ID，不同于SL单播，这里的destination L2 ID或destination L1ID并不是第二终端设备的标识。类似的，终端设备对中的标识也可以为为该SL组播或SL广播业务关联的destination L2 ID或destination L1 ID。
容易理解的，本申请实施例中，第一终端设备为发送端终端设备，第二终端设备为接收端终端设备。
通过该实现方式，可以标识该用于使能配置的指示信息对应的侧行链路，或者，该用于使能配置的指示信息对应的单个终端设备或终端设备对，有利于指示信息与侧行链路之间的对应。
本申请实施例中，在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信方法还包括：同步指示信息，该同步指示信息用于指示SL UPSS配置与SL DRX配置同步使能或去使能。可选的，同步指示信息与SL DRX使能指示信息同时发送，该同步指示信息可以包含在SL DRX指示信息中，或者独立发送，也就是说，同步指示信息和SL DRX指示信息可以是一条信息，也可以是分多条信息同时发送。
类似的，该同步指示信息也可以包含在SL UPSS指示信息中，或者SL UPSS指示信息和SL DRX指示信息可以为同一条指示信息，也可以为多条指示信息，可以是同时发送，或是，先后发送，本申请实施例并不限定。容易理解的，一种可能的实现方式中，SL UPSS指示信息和SL DRX指示信息同时发送是协议预定义的，也就是说，默认SL UPSS指示信息和SL DRX指示信息同时发送，或者说，一条指示信息中同时指示SL UPSS的使能操作和SL DRX的使能操作。可以理解的是，本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征，在某些场景下，可以不依赖于其他特征，比如其当前所基于的方案，而独立实施，解决相应的技术问题，达到相应的效果，也可以在某些场景下，依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的，本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能，在此不予赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例的各个方案可以进行合理的组合使用，并且实施例中出现的各个术语的解释或说明可以在各个实施例中互相参考或解释，对此不作限定。
还应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。上述各个过程涉及的各种数字编号或 序号仅为描述方便进行的区分，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
相应于上述方法实施例给出的方法，本申请实施例还提供了相应的装置，该装置包括用于执行上述实施例相应的模块。该模块可以是软件，也可以是硬件，或者是软件和硬件结合。可以理解的是，方法实施例所描述的技术特征同样适用于以下装置实施例。
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图7所示，该通信装置1000可以包括收发单元1100。可选地，该通信装置1000还包括处理单元1200。
在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备，例如，可以为终端设备，或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。
具体地，该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200或方法300或方法400或方法500或方法600中的第一终端设备，该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中方法200、或图3中方法300或图4中方法400或图5中方法500或图6中方法600中的第一终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作或功能分别为了实现图2中方法200、或图3中方法300或图4中方法400或图5中方法500或图6中方法600中的第一终端设备相应流程。
在一种实现方式中，处理单元1200可用于确定第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
可选的，收发单元1100可用于向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第二终端设备发送的第一辅助信息，该第一辅助信息包括该第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。处理单元1200还用于根据该第一辅助信息确定该第一指示信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第二终端设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据第四业务相关信息确定该第一指示信息，该第四业务相关信息为第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。
可选的，收发单元1100可用于向第二终端设备发送第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，收发单元1100可用于向第二终端设备发送第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
该收发单元1100用于接收网络设备发送的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第二终端设备发送第二指示信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息，该第一业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收网络设备发送的第一业务相关反馈指示信息，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收网络设备发送的第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收网络设备发送的第二去使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
该收发单元1100用于接收第二终端设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
处理单元1200用于根据第三指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第二终端设备发送第三辅助相关信息，该第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收第二终端设备发送的第三使能指示信息，该第三使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收第二终端设备发送的第三去使能指示信息，该第三去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
该收发单元1100用于接收第二终端设备发送的第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关。
该处理单元1200用于根据该一信息进行SL DRX周期调整。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
该处理单元1200用于确定第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路终端设备功率节省信号SL UPSS配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
该收发单元1100用于向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收第二终端设备的第四辅助信息，该第四辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
可选的，该处理单元1200还用于根据该第四辅助信息确定第四指示信息。
具体地，该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200或方法300或方法400或方法500或方法600中的第二终端设备，该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中方法200、或图3中方法300或图4中方法400或图5中方法500或图6中方法600中的第二终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作或功能分别为了实现图2中方法200、或图3中方法300或图4中方法400或图5中方法500或图6中方法600中的第二终端设备相应流程。
在一种可能的实现方式中，收发单元1100用于接收第一终端设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路选择的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
处理单元1200用于根据该第一指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，该第一辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一辅助反馈指示信息，该第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收网络设备发送的第一辅助反馈指示信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息确定向第一终端设备发送第一辅助信息，该SL DRX配置相关辅助信息为与SL DRX配置相关的辅助参考信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第一使能指示信息，该第一使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第一去使能指示信息，该第一去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
收发单元1100用于接收第一终端设备发送的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
处理单元1200用于根据第二指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息，该第二辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送SL DRX配置相关辅助信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收网络设备发送的第二辅助反馈指示信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据SL DRX配置相关辅助信息确定向第一终端设备发送第二辅助信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第二去使能指示信息，该第二去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
处理单元1200用于第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
收发单元1100用于向第一终端设备发送第三指示信息。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第三辅助信息，该第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据第三辅助信息确定第三指示信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据第二终端设备的业务相关信息确定第三指示信息，该第二终端设备的业务相关信息包括发送业务的需求。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第三使能指示信息，该第三使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第三去使能指示信息，该第三去使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
处理单元用于确定第一信息，第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，该SL DRX周期调整指示信息用于调整第一侧行链路的SL DRX周期，该第一侧行链路为第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。
处理单元1200还用于根据第三业务相关信息确定第一信息，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整指示信息，所述SL DRX周期调整指示信息与周期调整值和周期基准值有关，该第三业务相关信息为所述第二终端设备的业务相关信息
收发单元1100用于向第一终端设备发送该第一信息。可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值和SL DRX周期基准值。可选的，该第一信息包括SL DRX周期调整值。
在另一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
收发单元1100用于接收第一终端设备发送的第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为第一侧行链路使能SL UPSS配置，或者，为第一侧行链路去使能SL UPSS配置，第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
处理单元1200用于根据第四指示信息为第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
可选的，收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第四辅助信息，该第四辅助信息包括第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为终端设备(第一终端设备或第二终端设备)时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1100可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020，该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以为输入/输出接口电路。
在另一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备，例如，可以为网络设备，或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。
具体地，该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例方法300中的第一网络设备，该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图3中方法300中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作或功能分别为了实现图3中方法300中的第一网络设备相应流程。
在一种实现方式中，收发单元1100和处理单元1200可分别用于：
该处理单元1200用于确定第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，该使能操作包括为该第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为该第一侧行链路 去使能SL DRX配置，该第一侧行链路为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路。
该收发单元1100用于向该第一终端设备发送该第二指示信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第一业务相关信息，该第一业务相关信息为第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的业务相关信息。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据该第一业务相关信息确定第二指示信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送的第一业务相关反馈指示信息，该第一业务相关反馈指示信息用于指示向网络设备发送第一业务相关信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二终端设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
可选的，处理单元1200还用于根据第二辅助信息确定第二指示信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第二辅助反馈指示信息，该第二辅助反馈指示信息用于指示第一终端设备向网络设备发送SL DRX相关的辅助信息。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第二使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息指示为第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置。
可选的，该收发单元1100还用于向第一终端设备发送第二去使能指示信息，该第二使能指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为网络设备(第一网络设备或第二网络设备)时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1100可对应于图8中示出的网络设备2000中的收发器2020，该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图8中示出的网络设备2000中的处理器2010。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以为输入/输出接口电路。
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1所示的系统中，执行上述方法实施例中终端设备(第一终端设备或第二终端设备)的功能。如图8所示，该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地，该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中，处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制或数据信号，该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序，该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序，以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地，终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040，用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置，处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时，该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中，或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图7中的处理单元对应。
上述收发器2020可以与图7中的通信单元对应，也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中，接收器用于接收信号，发射器用于发射信号。
应理解，图8所示的终端设备2000能够实现图2至图6所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的(第一终端设备或第二终端设备)各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作或功能， 分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述，为避免重复，此处适当省略详细描述。
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作，而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
可选地，上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050，用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。
除此之外，为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善，该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个，所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图2至图6所示实施例中终端设备侧(第一终端设备或第二终端设备)的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图2至图6所示实施例中网络设备侧(第一网络设备或第二网络设备)的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种系统，其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备(比如，第一终端设备，第二终端设备)以及一个或多个网络设备(比如，第一网络设备，第二网络设备)。
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和接口；所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例中的通信的方法。
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤，除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征，在某些场景下，可以不依赖于其他特征，比如其当前所基于的方案，而独立实施，解决相应的技术问题，达到相应的效果，也可以在某些场景下，依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的，本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能，在此不予赘述。
本领域技术人员还可以了解到本申请实施例列出的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)可以通过电子硬件、电脑软件，或两者的结合进行实现。这样的功能是通过硬件还是软件来实现取决于特定的应用和整个系统的设计要求。本领域技术人员可以对于每种特定的应用，可以使用各种方法实现所述的功能，但这种实现不应被理解为超出本申请实施例保护的范围。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor， NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本申请所描述的技术可通过各种方式来实现。例如，这些技术可以用硬件、软件或者硬件结合的方式来实现。对于硬件实现，用于在通信装置(例如，基站，终端、网络实体、或芯片)处执行这些技术的处理单元，可以实现在一个或多个通用处理器、DSP、数字信号处理器件、ASIC、可编程逻辑器件、FPGA、或其它可编程逻辑装置，离散门或晶体管逻辑，离散硬件部件，或上述任何组合中。通用处理器可以为微处理器，可选地，该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现，例如数字信号处理器和微处理器，多个微处理器，一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信号处理器核，或任何其它类似的配置来实现。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种系统，其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital  subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
应理解，说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此，在整个说明书各个实施例未必一定指相同的实施例。此外，这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
还应理解，在本申请中，“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下UE或者基站会做出相应的处理，并非是限定时间，且也不要求UE或基站实现时一定要有判断的动作，也不意味着存在其它限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以理解：本申请中涉及的第一、第二等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围，也表示先后顺序。
本申请中对于使用单数表示的元素旨在用于表示“一个或多个”，而并非表示“一个且仅一个”，除非有特别说明。本申请中，在没有特别说明的情况下，“至少一个”旨在用于表示“一个或者多个”，“多个”旨在用于表示“两个或两个以上”。
另外，本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，其中A可以是单数或者复数，B可以是单数或者复数。
字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
本文中术语“……中的至少一个”或“……中的至少一种”，表示所列出的各项的全部或任意组合，例如，“A、B和C中的至少一种”，可以表示：单独存在A，单独存在B，单独存在C，同时存在A和B，同时存在B和C，同时存在A、B和C这六种情况，其中A可以是单数或者复数，B可以是单数或者复数，C可以是单数或者复数。
应理解，在本申请各实施例中，“与A相应的B”表示B与A相关联，根据A可以确定B。但还应理解，根据A确定B并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。
这里作统一说明，本申请实施例中的“预定义”可以理解为定义、预先定义、存储、预存储、预协商、预配置、固化、或预烧制。本申请实施例中的配置可以理解为通过RRC信令、MAC信令、物理层信息通知，其中物理层信息可以通过PDCCH或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)，或者物理旁链路控制信道(physical sidelink control channel，PSCCH)，或者物理旁链路共享信道(physical sidelink shared channel，PSSCH)传输。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范 围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (72)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收所述第二通信设备发送的第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备确定第一指示信息还包括：
    所述第一通信设备根据所述第一辅助信息确定所述第一指示信息。
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，所述第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息为SL DRX配置信息，或者，所述第一指示信息包含在SL DRX配置信息中。
  6. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二通信设备接收第一通信设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第二通信设备根据所述第一指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备在向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息时，启动定时器T1。
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，如下一个或多个条件满足时，所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息：
    第二通信设备当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或多项值与前一次反馈的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的对应项值不同、与对应项值的差值超过预设门限、定时器T1不在运行、电量充足且当前SL DRX生效、或者电量不充足或电量过低且当前SL DRX未生效。
  10. 根据权利要求6至9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第二通信设备接收第一辅助反馈指示信息，所述第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息；
    其中，所述第二通信设备接收第一辅助反馈指示信息包括：
    所述第二通信设备接收来自所述第一通信设备的所述第一辅助反馈指示信息；或者，所述第二通信设备接收来自第三通信设备的所述第一辅助反馈指示信息。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息，所述第二通信设备根据所述第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息为所述第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息携带在旁链路控制信息SCI、媒体接入控制元素MAC CE或PC5-无线资源控制RRC消息中。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。
  14. 根据权利要求1至13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括同步指示信息，所述同步指示信息用于指示所述SL DRX配置与旁链路终端设备功率节省信号SL UPSS配置同步使能或去使能。
  15. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第三通信设备确定第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第二指示信息。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第三通信设备接收所述第一通信设备发送的第一业务相关信息，所述第一业务相关信息为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息；
    其中，所述第三通信设备确定第二指示信息，包括：
    所述第三通信设备根据所述第一业务相关信息确定所述第二指示信息。
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第三通信设备接收所述第一通信设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；
    其中，所述第三通信设备确定第二指示信息，包括：
    所述第三通信设备根据所述第二辅助信息确定所述第二指示信息。
  18. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备接收第三通信设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送所述第二指示信息。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送第一业务相关信息，所述第一业务相关信息为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一通信设备接收所述第二通信设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL  DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送所述第二辅助信息。
  21. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二通信设备接收第一通信设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第二通信设备根据所述第二指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  23. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二通信设备确定第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第三指示信息。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二通信设备确定第三指示信息包括：
    所述第二通信设备根据第三辅助信息和/或所述第二通信设备的业务相关信息确定所述第三指示信息；
    其中，所述第二通信设备接收所述第一通信设备发送的所述第三辅助信息，所述第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
  25. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二通信设备确定业务需求信息，所述业务需求包括所述第二通信设备需要发送业务或所述第二通信设备不需要发送业务；
    所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，所述第二通信设备确定为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备确定第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述t个时间单元内采取随机选择获取或确定资源时，启动感知(sensing)，和/或，在所述t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知(full sensing)或部分感知(partial sensing)。
  29. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第二通信设备确定需要发送业务时，启动感知。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第二通信设备获得感知结果之前，所述第二通信设备采用随机选择的方式获取资源；和/或，
    在所述第二通信设备获得感知结果之后，所述第二通信设备基于感知结果获取或确定资源。
  31. 根据权利要求26至30任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第三指示信息。
  32. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备接收第二通信设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述第一通信设备根据所述第三指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第三辅助相关信息，所述第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    收发单元，用于向所述第二通信设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收所述第二通信设备发送的第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于根据所述第一辅助信息确定所述第一指示信息。
  37. 根据权利要求34或35所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于向所述第二通信设备发送第一辅助反馈指示信息，所述第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息。
  38. 根据权利要求34至37所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息为SL DRX配置信息，或者，所述第一指示信息包含在SL DRX配置信息中。
  39. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第一通信设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于向所述第一通信设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于在向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息时，启动定时器T1。
  42. 根据权利要求40或41所述的装置，其特征在于，如下一个或多个条件满足时，所述收发单元向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息：
    第二通信设备当前的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的一项或多项值与前一次反馈的SL DRX相关辅助信息中的对应项值不同、与对应项值的差值超过预设门限、定时器T1不在运行、电量充足且当前SL DRX生效、或者电量不充足或电量过低且当前SL DRX未生效。
  43. 根据权利要求39至42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收第一辅助反馈指示信息，所述第一辅助反馈指示信息用于指示所述收发单元向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一辅助信息；
    所述收发单元还用于接收来自所述第一通信设备的所述第一辅助反馈指示信息；或者，所述收发单元还用于接收来自第三通信设备的所述第一辅助反馈指示信息。
  44. 根据权利要求1至43所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息，所述处理单元还用于根据所述第一SL DRX配置释放指示信息为所述第一侧行链路释放SL DRX配置。
  45. 根据权利要求1至44所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息携带在旁链路控制信息SCI、媒体接入控制元素MAC CE或PC5-无线资源控制RRC消息中。
  46. 根据权利要求1至45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括旁链路的标识、或单个通信设备的标识或通信设备对的标识。
  47. 根据权利要求1至46所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还包括同步指示信息，所述同步指示信息用于指示所述SL DRX配置与旁链路终端设备功率节省信号SL UPSS配置同步使能或去使能。
  48. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    收发单元，用于向所述第一通信设备发送所述第二指示信息。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收所述第一通信设备发送的第一业务相关信息，所述第一业务相关信息为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息；
    所述处理单元还用于根据所述第一业务相关信息确定所述第二指示信息。
  50. 根据权利要求48或49所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收所述第一通信设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；
    所述处理单元还用于根据所述第二辅助信息确定所述第二指示信息。
  51. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第三通信设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    所述收发单元还用于向所述第二通信设备发送所述第二指示信息。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的装置，其特征在于，所述所述收发单元还用于向所述第三通信设备发送第一业务相关信息，所述第一业务相关信息为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息。
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述所述收发单元还用于接收所述第二通信设备发送的第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种；
    所述所述收发单元还用于向所述第三通信设备发送所述第二辅助信息。
  54. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第一通信设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为所述第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第二指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于向所述第
    一通信设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括所述第二通信设备的电量百分比信息、电量等级、电量充足指示信息、终端设备的省电类型信息、空内容的SL DRX调整值信息、使能或者去使能SL DRX配置指示信息、资源配置信息中的一种或多种。
  56. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    收发单元，用于向所述第一通信设备发送所述第三指示信息。
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的装置，其特征在于，所述所述处理单元还用于根据第三辅助信息和/或所述第二通信设备的业务相关信息确定所述第三指示信息；
    其中，所述收发单元还用于接收所述第一通信设备发送的所述第三辅助信息，所述第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
  58. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定业务需求信息，所述业务需求包括第二通信设备需要发送业务或所述第二通信设备不需要发送业务；
    在确定需要发送业务时，所述处理单元还用于确定为第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，其中，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路。
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于确定第三指示信息， 所述第三指示信息用于指示第一侧行链路的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置。
  60. 根据权利要求58或59所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于在确定需要发送业务后的前t个时间单元内采用随机选择获取或确定资源，其中，t为大于0的整数或小数。
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于在所述t个时间单元内采取随机选择获取或确定资源时，启动感知(sensing)，和/或，在所述t个时间单元结束后，确定基于感知结果来获取或确定资源，所述感知包括全感知(full sensing)或部分感知(partial sensing)。
  62. 根据权利要求58或59所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于在确定需要发送业务时，启动感知。
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于在获得感知结果之前，采用随机选择的方式获取资源；和/或，
    在获得感知结果之后，所述处理单元还用于基于感知结果获取或确定资源。
  64. 根据权利要求59至63任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于向所述第一通信设备发送所述第三指示信息。
  65. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第二通信设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示为第一侧行链路确定的使能操作，所述使能操作包括为所述第一侧行链路使能旁链路非连续接收SL DRX配置，或者，为所述第一侧行链路去使能SL DRX配置，所述第一侧行链路为第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的侧行链路；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第三指示信息为所述第一侧行链路确定使能操作。
  66. 根据权利要求65所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于向所述第二通信设备发送第三辅助相关信息，所述第三辅助信息包括如下一个或多个信息：所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间的业务相关信息、资源配置信息。
  67. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求32或33所述的方法，或者用于执行如权利要求6至14中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求21或22中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求23或24所述的方法，或者用于执行如权利要求25或31所述的方法。
  68. 一种装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求15至17中任一项所述的方法。
  69. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，其特征在于，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求32或33所述的方法，或者用于执行如权利要求6至14中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求21或22中任一项所述的方法，或者，用于执行如权利要求23或24所述的方法，或者用于执行如权利要求25或31所述的方法。
  70. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，其特征在于，所述计算 机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求15至17中任一项所述的方法。
  71. 一种通信系统，包括：如权利要求67中所述的装置，和/或，权利要求68中所述的装置。
  72. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，包括指令，当所述指令被运行时，使得如权利要求1至33任一项所述的方法被执行。
PCT/CN2021/072700 2020-01-22 2021-01-19 配置使能方法及装置 WO2021147856A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21743820.9A EP4080914A4 (en) 2020-01-22 2021-01-19 CONFIGURATION ACTIVATION METHOD AND DEVICE
US17/869,882 US20220361283A1 (en) 2020-01-22 2022-07-21 Configuration enabling method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010075658 2020-01-22
CN202010075658.4 2020-01-22
CN202010851968.0A CN113163358A (zh) 2020-01-22 2020-08-21 配置使能方法及装置
CN202010851968.0 2020-08-21

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/869,882 Continuation US20220361283A1 (en) 2020-01-22 2022-07-21 Configuration enabling method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021147856A1 true WO2021147856A1 (zh) 2021-07-29

Family

ID=76882186

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/072700 WO2021147856A1 (zh) 2020-01-22 2021-01-19 配置使能方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20220361283A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4080914A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN113163358A (zh)
WO (1) WO2021147856A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11576122B1 (en) 2021-08-05 2023-02-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink discontinuous reception (DRX) support indication and detection
WO2023015056A1 (en) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink discontinuous reception (drx) support indication and detection

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115567952A (zh) * 2021-07-02 2023-01-03 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 配置方法、设备及计算机可读存储介质
CN113767651A (zh) * 2021-08-04 2021-12-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 通信配置方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
CN116094672A (zh) * 2021-11-05 2023-05-09 维沃移动通信有限公司 资源选择方法、装置及终端
WO2023108655A1 (zh) * 2021-12-17 2023-06-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种确定直连链路非连续接收配置的方法及其装置
WO2023185406A1 (zh) * 2022-03-28 2023-10-05 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法和装置
KR20230144836A (ko) * 2022-04-08 2023-10-17 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 사이드링크 기반 릴레이 통신에서 불연속 수신모드 동작을 지원하기 위한 장치 및 방법
CN117528721A (zh) * 2022-07-29 2024-02-06 维沃移动通信有限公司 处理方法、设备及可读存储介质

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016180463A1 (en) * 2015-05-11 2016-11-17 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Methods and apparatusses for enabling/disabling a drx mode
WO2018064477A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-05 Intel IP Corporation Systems and methods for discontinuous reception in device-to-device communication
US20190053305A1 (en) * 2016-02-08 2019-02-14 Kyocera Corporation Radio terminal
CN109479189A (zh) * 2016-07-21 2019-03-15 三星电子株式会社 设备到设备(d2d)通信中通过侧链路发现用户设备(ue)的系统和方法

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ES2654187T3 (es) * 2012-12-10 2018-02-12 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Dispositivo inalámbrico, nodo de red radioeléctrica y métodos para la recepción discontinua en comunicaciones de dispositivo a dispositivo
CN105474726B (zh) * 2013-08-07 2019-05-31 三星电子株式会社 用于在无线通信系统中传送和接收资源分配信息的方法和装置
RU2735332C1 (ru) * 2017-08-25 2020-10-30 Гуандун Оппо Мобайл Телекоммьюникейшнз Корп., Лтд. Способ прерывистого приема, терминал и сетевое устройство

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016180463A1 (en) * 2015-05-11 2016-11-17 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Methods and apparatusses for enabling/disabling a drx mode
US20190053305A1 (en) * 2016-02-08 2019-02-14 Kyocera Corporation Radio terminal
CN109479189A (zh) * 2016-07-21 2019-03-15 三星电子株式会社 设备到设备(d2d)通信中通过侧链路发现用户设备(ue)的系统和方法
WO2018064477A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-05 Intel IP Corporation Systems and methods for discontinuous reception in device-to-device communication

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LG ELECTRONICS: "Summary of email discussion on Rel-17 sidelink enhancement", 3GPP TSG RAN #86; RP-192745, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP),SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, 2 December 2019 (2019-12-02), Sitges, ES; 20191209 - 20191212, XP051834348 *
See also references of EP4080914A4

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11576122B1 (en) 2021-08-05 2023-02-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink discontinuous reception (DRX) support indication and detection
WO2023015056A1 (en) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink discontinuous reception (drx) support indication and detection

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113163358A (zh) 2021-07-23
EP4080914A4 (en) 2023-06-21
US20220361283A1 (en) 2022-11-10
EP4080914A1 (en) 2022-10-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021147856A1 (zh) 配置使能方法及装置
CN109219116B (zh) 一种终端设备的休眠方法及装置
US11356949B2 (en) Signal transmission method, base station, and network node
US20230026953A1 (en) Drx control method and apparatus
WO2020034218A1 (zh) 非连续传输的方法和设备
TWI822745B (zh) 監聽pdcch的方法、終端設備和網路設備
WO2021180098A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和通信装置
WO2020191638A1 (zh) Pdcch监听方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN116367191A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2018035816A1 (zh) 传输数据的方法、终端设备和基站
CN114731660A (zh) 带宽部分bwp的处理方法、设备及存储介质
WO2024092653A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023102788A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023115565A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备、接入网设备和核心网设备
WO2023044655A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
EP4319385A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022061605A1 (zh) 一种资源指示方法、电子设备及存储介质
WO2024032402A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2022188078A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2024065137A1 (zh) 配置信息获取方法, 配置信息转发方法以及终端设备
WO2022028212A1 (zh) 信息处理方法、装置及终端
WO2023124823A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2022116153A1 (zh) 寻呼指示方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2022193198A1 (zh) 侧行链路资源请求方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN117676891A (zh) 通信方法和通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21743820

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021743820

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220721

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE